24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports
Contents
1 Get Started
2 Configure System Information
3 Configure Switching
4 Configure Routing
5 Configure Quality of Service
6 Manage Device Security
7 Monitor the Switch and the Traffic
8 Maintain or Troubleshoot the switch
A Configuration Examples
B Specifications and Default Settings

NETGEAR GS752TPP User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for GS752TPP by NETGEAR which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

NETGEAR NETGEAR Manual

NETGEAR AGM731F Manual

NETGEAR ProSafe GS724TR Manual

NETGEAR GS608-300PES Manual

NETGEAR N600 Manual

NETGEAR GSM7248 Manual

NETGEAR WN2500RP Manual

NETGEAR, Inc.

350 East Plumeria Drive

San Jose, CA 95134, USA

March 2020

202-12021-03

User Manual

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+

Smart Managed Pro Switches

with 4 SFP Ports

Models GS728TPv2, GS728TPPv2,

GS752TPv2, and GS752TPP

User Manual

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual2

Support and Community

Visit netgear.com/support to get your questions answered and access the latest downloads.

You can also check out our NETGEAR Community for helpful advice at community.netgear.com.

Regulatory and Legal

Si ce produit est vendu au Canada, vous pouvez accéder à ce document en français canadien à

https://www.netgear.com/support/download/.

(If this product is sold in Canada, you can access this document in Canadian French at

https://www.netgear.com/support/download/.)

For regulatory compliance information including the EU Declaration of Conformity, visit

https://www.netgear.com/about/regulatory/.

See the regulatory compliance document before connecting the power supply.

For NETGEAR's Privacy Policy, visit https://www.netgear.com/about/privacy-policy.

By using this device, you are agreeing to NETGEAR's Terms and Conditions at

https://www.netgear.com/about/terms-and-conditions. If you do not agree, return the device to your place of

purchase within your return period.

Do not use this device outdoors. The PoE source is intended for intra building connection only.

Trademarks

trademarks are used for reference purposes only.

Revision History

Publication

Part Number

Publish Date Comments

202-12021-03 March 2020 • We changed Reboot the switch.

• We changed Reset the switch to its factory default settings and added the

following sections:

- Reset the switch to factory default settings but maintain the registration

status.

- Reset the switch to factory default settings and reset the registration

status.

202-12021-02 February 2020 • We changed the login procedures for all tasks, including the tasks for initial

access in Chapter 1, Get Started. After you register and access the switch

with your NETGEAR account, you now can access the switch with the local

device password. You now can also obtain and use a registration key for

offline access.

• We changed Credentials for the local browser UI.

• We changed Register the switch and added two sections:

- Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and access the switch

online

- Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and get a registration

key for offline access

• We changed Reset the switch to its factory default settings.

• We added Use an HTTP session to download and install an SSL security

certificate file on the switch.

• We changed local browser interface to local browser UI.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual3

202-12021-01 August 2019 • We changed the login procedures for all tasks. After you register and access

the switch with your NETGEAR account, you can now access the switch with

the local device password.

• The switch now supports management through the NETGEAR Insight app

and Insight Cloud portal.

• We reorganized the information in Chapter 1, Get Started and added or

revised the following sections:

- Available publications

- Switch management options and default management mode

- About on-network and off-network access

- Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet

- Access the switch off-network

- Credentials for the local browser UI

- Register the switch

- Change the language of the local browser UI

- Change the management mode of the switch

- PoE Max LED in the Device View

- LED Mode LED in the Device View

• In other chapters, we added the following sections:

- PoE concepts

- Device class power requirements

- Power allocation and power budget concepts

- Hardware technical specifications

• Throughout the manual, we did the following:

- We added or revised many standard sections.

- We updated the Auto-VoIP VLAN information.

- We made many other minor changes and improvements.

• We published the manual in a new format.

202-11825-03 October 2018 • Changed Switch management options and default management mode.

• Added Use the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to discover the IP address

of the switch.

• Added Use the NETGEAR Insight app to discover the IP address of the

switch.

• Changed Change the local device password for the local browser UI.

• Changed Configure the HTTP settings.

• Changed Configure the HTTPS settings.

• Added You cannot log in to the switch.

• Removed references to the resource CD.

202-11825-02 June 2018 Changed Configure VLAN settings.

202-11825-01 April 2018 First publication

Contents

Chapter 1 Get Started

Available publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Switch management options and default management mode . . . . . . . . .15

Manage the switch by using the local browser UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Software Requirements to use the local browser UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Supported web browsers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Navigation tabs, configuration menus, and page menu. . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Configuration and Status Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Buttons in the local browser UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

User-defined fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Context-sensitive help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

About on-network and off-network access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet . . . . . . . . . .20

Use a Windows-based computer to access the switch on-network . . .21

Use a Mac with Bonjour to access the switch on-network . . . . . . . . . . .23

Use the NETGEAR Insight app to discover the IP address

of the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Use the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to discover the IP

address of the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Discover the switch in a network with a DHCP server

using the Smart Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Discover the switch in a network without a DHCP server

using the Smart Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Use other options to discover the switch IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Access the switch on-network when you know the switch IP address .30

Access the switch off-network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Credentials for the local browser UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

access the switch online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

registration key for offline access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Change the language of the local browser UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Change the management mode of the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

About changing the management mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Change the management mode to NETGEAR Insight

Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Change the management mode back to Directly Connect

to Web-browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Use the Device View of the local browser UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Power LED in the Device View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual5

Fan LED in the Device View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

PoE Max LED in the Device View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

LED Mode LED in the Device View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Configure interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Access the NETGEAR support website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Access the user manual online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chapter 2 Configure System Information

View or define system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

View the fan status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

View the power supply information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

View the software versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

View the system CPU status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Configure the CPU thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

View USB device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Configure the IP network settings for management access . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Configure the IPv4 network and VLAN settings for the

local browser UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Configure the IPv6 network settings for the local browser

interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

View the IPv6 network neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Configure the time settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Configure the time setting manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Configure the time settings with SNTP and configure the

global SNTP settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

View the SNTP global status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Configure an SNTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Configure daylight saving time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

View the daylight saving time status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Configure denial of service settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Configure Auto-DoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Configure denial of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Configure DNS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Configure the global DNS settings and add a DNS server. . . . . . . . . . .89

Remove a DNS server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Configure and view host name-to-IP address information . . . . . . . . . . .92

Configure green Ethernet settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Configure the global green Ethernet settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Configure green Ethernet interface settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Use the Device View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Configure Power over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

PoE concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Device class power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Power allocation and power budget concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Configure the global PoE settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Configure the PoE port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Configure the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual6

Configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

View the supported MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Configure SNMPv3 users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Configure LLDP global settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Configure LLDP port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

View the LLDP-MED network policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Configure the LLDP-MED port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

View the local information advertised through LLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

View the LLDP neighbors information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Configure a DHCP L2 relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Enable the DHCP L2 relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Configure a DHCP L2 relay interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

View DHCP L2 relay interface statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Configure DHCP snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Configure the global DHCP snooping settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Enable DHCP for all member interfaces of a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Configure DHCP snooping interface settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Configure static DHCP bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Configure DHCP snooping persistent settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

View or clear DHCP snooping statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Configure Dynamic ARP Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Configure the global DAI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Configure DAI on a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Configure DAI on an interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Configure a DAI ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

View DAI Statistics per VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Set up PoE timer schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Create a PoE timer schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Specify the settings for an absolute PoE timer schedule . . . . . . . . . . 152

Specify the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Change the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule entry . . . . . 156

Delete a PoE timer schedule entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Delete a PoE timer schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Chapter 3 Configure Switching

Configure the port settings and maximum frame size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Configure link aggregation groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Configure LAG settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Configure LAG membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Set the LACP system priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Set the LACP port priority settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Configure VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Configure VLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Configure VLAN membership. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

View the VLAN status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual7

Configure the PVID settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Configure a MAC-based VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Configure protocol-based VLAN groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Configure protocol-based VLAN group membership. . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Configure a voice VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Configure GARP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Configure GARP ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Configure Auto-VoIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Configure the Auto-VoIP protocol-based settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Configure the Auto-VoIP OUI-based properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Configure the OUI-based port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Manage the OUI table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Display the Auto-VoIP status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Configure Spanning Tree Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

Configure the STP settings and view the STP status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Configure the CST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Configure the CST port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

View the CST port status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

View the Rapid STP information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Manage the MST settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Configure and view the port settings for an MST instance . . . . . . . . . 213

View the STP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Configure multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

View, search, or clear the MFDB table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

View the MFDB statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Configure the auto-video multicast settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Manage IGMP snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

Configure IGMP snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Configure IGMP snooping for interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

View, search, or clear the IGMP snooping table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Configure IGMP snooping for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN and remove it from the table . . 230

Configure one or more IGMP multicast router interfaces. . . . . . . . . . 230

Configure an IGMP multicast router VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

IGMP snooping querier overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Configure an IGMP snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Configure an IGMP snooping querier for VLANs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Display the status of the IGMP snooping querier for VLANs . . . . . . . 236

Manage MLD snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Enable MLD snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Configure MLD snooping for interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Configure the MLD VLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Modify the MLD snooping settings for a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Remove MLD snooping from a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Configure one or more MLD multicast router interfaces . . . . . . . . . . 244

Configure an MLD multicast router VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Configure an MLD snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual8

Configure the MLD snooping querier VLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Configure multicast VLAN registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Configure the global MVR settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Configure an MVR group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Configure MVR group membership. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Configure the MVR interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

View the MVR statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

View, search, and manage the MAC address table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

View, search, or clear the MAC address table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Set the dynamic address aging interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Add a static MAC address to the MAC address table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Configure Layer 2 loop protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

Configure global Layer 2 loop protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

View and configure Layer 2 loop protection on a port . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Chapter 4 Configure Routing

Routing concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Configure the routing mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

Configure the router settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

View the IP routing statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Configure IPv6 routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Configure the global IPv6 routing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

View the IPv6 route table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Configure the IPv6 VLAN interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Configure an IPv6 prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

View the IPv6 routing statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

View, search, or clear the IPv6 neighbor table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Configure an IPv6 static route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Configure IPv6 route preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Configure VLAN routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

Create a routing interface with the VLAN Static Routing Wizard . . . . 290

Manage a VLAN routing interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Delete a VLAN routing interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Configure router discovery for a VLAN routing interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

Manage routes and view the routing table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

Manually add a route and view the routing table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Modify a route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Delete a route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Configure Address Resolution Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

View the ARP cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Manually add an entry to the ARP table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

View or globally configure the ARP table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Remove ARP entries from the ARP cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Chapter 5 Configure Quality of Service

Quality of Service concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual9

Manage Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

CoS configuration concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Configure the global CoS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Configure the CoS settings for an interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Configure the CoS queue settings for an interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Map 802.1p priorities to queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Map DSCP values to queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Manage Differentiated Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

Defining DiffServ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Configure the DiffServ mode and display the entries in the

DiffServ private MIB tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Configure a DiffServ class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Configure DiffServ IPv6 class settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Configure a DiffServ Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Configure the DiffServ service interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

View DiffServ service statistic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Chapter 6 Manage Device Security

Change the local device password for the local browser UI . . . . . . . . . 346

Manage the RADIUS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

Configure the global RADIUS server settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Configure a RADIUS authentication server on the switch. . . . . . . . . . 350

Configure a RADIUS accounting server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Configure the TACACS+ settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356

Configure the global TACACS+ settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Configure a TACACS+ server on the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Modify the settings for a TACACS+ server on the switch . . . . . . . . . . 359

Remove a TACACS+ server from the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Configure authentication lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Configure an HTTP authentication list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Configure an HTTPS authentication list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Configure the dot1x authentication list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Manage the Smart Control Center Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

Configure management access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Configure the HTTP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Configure the HTTPS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Manage certificates for HTTPS access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Control access with profiles and rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

Add an access profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Add a rule to the access profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Activate the access profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Display the access profile summary and the number of

filtered packets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Deactivate an access profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Remove an access profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Configure port authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383

Configure global 802.1X settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual10

Manage port authentication on individual ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

View the port summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

View the client summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Set up traffic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392

Manage MAC filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Configure storm control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Manage port security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Configure protected ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Manage private VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Configure access control lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414

Use the ACL Wizard to create a simple ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Configure a MAC ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Configure MAC ACL rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Configure MAC bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

View or delete MAC ACL bindings in the MAC binding table. . . . . . 430

Configure a basic or extended IPv4 ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Configure rules for a basic IPv4 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Configure rules for an extended IPv4 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Configure an IPv6 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Configure rules for an IPv6 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Configure IP ACL interface bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

View or delete IP ACL bindings in the IP ACL binding table . . . . . . . 460

Configure VLAN ACL bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Chapter 7 Monitor the Switch and the Traffic

Monitor the switch and the ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

View or clear switch statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

View port statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

View and manage detailed port statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

View or clear EAP and EAPoL statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Perform a cable test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

Configure and view the logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482

Manage and view the memory logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Manage and view the flash log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Manage the server log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

View or clear the trap logs and the counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Configure port mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491

Chapter 8 Maintain or Troubleshoot the switch

Reboot the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Reset the switch to its factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496

Reset the switch to factory default settings but maintain the

registration status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Reset the switch to factory default settings and reset the

registration status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Export a file from the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499

Use TFTP to export a file from the switch to a TFTP server. . . . . . . . . 499

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual11

Use HTTP to export a file from the switch to a computer . . . . . . . . . . 501

Export a file from the switch to a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

Download a file to the switch or update the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503

Use TFTP to download a file to the switch or update the

software image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Use HTTP to download a file to the switch or update the

software image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

Use an HTTP session to download and install an SSL

security certificate file on the switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Download a file from a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Manage software images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512

Copy a software image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Configure dual image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

View the dual image status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Perform diagnostics and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

Ping an IPv4 address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Ping an IPv6 address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

Send an IPv4 traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

Send an IPv6 traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Enable remote diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

Configure memory dump settings and perform a full

memory dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

You cannot log in to the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

Appendix A Configuration Examples

Virtual local area networks (VLANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

VLAN configuration examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

Access control lists (ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532

MAC ACL example configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

Basic IPv4 ACL example configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

Differentiated Services (DiffServ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535

Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

DiffServ traffic classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

Create policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

DiffServ example configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

802.1X access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539

802.1X example configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542

MSTP example configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

VLAN routing interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545

Appendix B Specifications and Default Settings

Switch default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

General feature default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549

System setup and maintenance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556

Port characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557

Traffic control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

User Manual12

Quality of service settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558

Security settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558

System management settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559

Settings for other features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559

Hardware technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560

1Get Started

This user manual describes how you can configure and operate the following NETGEAR 24-Port

and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports by using the

local browser user interface (UI):

• GS728TPv2. NETGEAR 24-Port Gigabit PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switch With 4 SFP

Ports. This model provides a PoE power budget of 190W.

• GS728TPPv2. NETGEAR 24-Port Gigabit PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switch With 4 SFP

Ports. This model provides a PoE power budget of 380W.

• GS752TPv2. NETGEAR 48-Port Gigabit PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switch With 4 SFP

Ports. This model provides a PoE power budget of 380W.

• GS752TPP. NETGEAR 48-Port Gigabit PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switch With 4 SFP

Ports. This model provides a PoE power budget of 760W.

The manual describes the software configuration procedures and explains the options that are

available within those procedures.

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Available publications

•Switch management options and default management mode

•Manage the switch by using the local browser UI

•Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet

•Access the switch off-network

•Credentials for the local browser UI

•Register the switch

•Change the language of the local browser UI

•Change the management mode of the switch

•Use the Device View of the local browser UI

•Configure interface settings

•Access the NETGEAR support website

•Access the user manual online

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual14

Note: In this manual, we refer to all switch models as the switch. Unless

noted otherwise, all information applies to all switch models.

Note: For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the

support website at netgear.com/support.

Note: Firmware updates with new features and bug fixes are made available

from time to time at netgear.com/support/download/. Some

products can regularly check the site and download new firmware, or

you can check for and download new firmware manually. If the

features or behavior of your product does not match what is described

in this guide, you might need to update your firmware.

Available publications

The following guides are available at netgear.com/support/download/:

•Installation Guide

•Hardware Installation Guide

For information about the NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud portal, visit

netgear.com/insight and netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base

articles about NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual15

Switch management options and default

management mode

If you prefer, you can use the switch as a plug-and-play device, so you do not need to set up

a custom configuration. Just connect power, connect to your network and to your other

devices, and you’re done.

The switch provides administrative management options that let you configure, monitor, and

control the network. The local browser UI is enabled by default, allowing you to configure the

switch and the network from a web browser. You can also choose to manage the switch by

using the NETGEAR Insight app on a smartphone or tablet. Or, if you are an Insight Premium

or Pro subscriber, you can choose to manage the switch from the Insight Cloud portal that is

available from a web browser on your Windows-based computer, Mac, or tablet.

The switch provides the following management options that let you discover the switch on the

network and configure, monitor, and control the switch:

• Local browser UI. By default, the management mode of the switch is set to Directly

Connect to Web Browser Interface, which lets you access the local browser UI. In this

mode, you can change all settings of the switch.

• NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud portal. If you set the management mode of

the switch to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal, you can use the

following applications to manage the switch remotely:

-NETGEAR Insight app. With the NETGEAR Insight app, you can discover the switch

on the network and add the switch to the NETGEAR Insight app so that you can set

up the switch in the network and manage and monitor the switch remotely from your

smartphone or tablet. You can choose from four methods to add the switch to the

NETGEAR Insight app: You can scan your network for the switch, scan the QR code

or the barcode of the switch, or add the serial number of the switch.

-Insight Cloud portal. As an Insight Premium or Insight Pro subscriber, you can use

the NETGEAR Insight Cloud portal to set up the switch in the network, perform

advanced remote setup, configuration, and management, monitor the switch, analyze

the switch and network usage, and, if necessary, troubleshoot the switch and the

network. A free trial is available for new customers.

For more information about NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/insight and

netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base articles about

NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

To use the NETGEAR Insight app or Insight Cloud portal methods, you must change the

management method to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal. After you do

so, you can also change the management method back to Directly Connect to Web Browser

Interface and use the local browser UI. For more information, see Change the management

mode of the switch on page 41.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual16

Manage the switch by using the local

browser UI

This manual describes how to use the local browser UI to manage and monitor the switch.

For information about using the NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud portal to manage

the switch, visit netgear.com/insight and netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For

knowledge base articles about NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

Software Requirements to use the local browser UI

To access the switch by using a web browser, the browser must meet the following software

requirements:

•HTML version 4.0, or later

•HTTP version 1.1, or later

Supported web browsers

The following browsers were tested and support the local browser UI. Later browser versions

might function fine but were not tested. The supported web browsers include the following:

•Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) version 11

•Microsoft Edge

•Mozilla Firefox version 45

•Chrome version 51

•Safari on Windows OS versions 5.1

•Safari on MAC OS X version 10.1

Navigation tabs, configuration menus, and page menu

The following figure shows the System Information page for model GS752TPP.

Navigation tab Configuration menu Logout button

Language menu

Button

Page menu Configuration status

Page help

and options

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual17

Figure 1. Switch navigation tabs, configuration menus, and page menu

The navigation tabs along the top of the local browser UI give you quick access to the various

switch functions. The tabs are always available and remain constant, regardless of which

feature you configure.

When you select a tab, the features for that tab appear as menus directly under the tabs. The

configuration menus in the blue bar change according to the navigation tab that is selected.

The configuration pages for each feature are available as submenu links in the page menu

on the left side of the page. Some items in the menu expand to reveal multiple submenu

links, as the following figure shows.

Link

Submenu

links

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual18

Figure 2. Switch page menu link and submenu links

Configuration and Status Options

The area directly under the configuration menus and to the right of the links displays the

configuration information or status for the page you select. On pages that contain

configuration options, you might be able to enter information into fields, select options from

menus, select check boxes, and select radio buttons.

Each page contains access to the HTML-based help that explains the fields and configuration

options for the page.

Buttons in the local browser UI

Each page also contains command buttons. The following table shows the command buttons

that are used throughout the pages in the local browser UI:

Table 1. Command buttons in the local browser UI

Button Function

Add Clicking the Add button adds the new item configured in the heading row of a table.

Apply Clicking the Apply button saves your settings. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Cancel Clicking the Cancel button cancels the configuration on the page and resets the data on

the page to the previous values of the switch.

Delete Clicking the Delete button removes the selected item.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual19

User-defined fields

User-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the

configuration web page. All characters can be used except for the ones stated in the

following table (unless specifically noted in a procedure for a feature).

Table 2. Invalid characters for user-defined fields

Invalid characters for user-defined fields

\ | / < > * ?

Context-sensitive help

When you log in to the switch, every page contains a link to the online help () that contains

information to assist in configuring and managing the switch. The online help pages are

context sensitive. For example, if the IP Configuration page is open, the help topic for that

page displays if you click the link to the online help.

About on-network and off-network access

You can access the switch either on-network or off-network:

• On-network and connected to the Internet. When you use the local browser UI, for

easiest access, we recommend that you cable the switch to a network that is connected

to the Internet and that includes a router or DHCP server that assigns IP addresses,

power on the switch, and then use a computer that is connected to the same network as

the switch to connect to the local browser UI. We refer to this setup as on-network.

For more information, see Access the switch on-network and connected to the Internet

on page 20).

• Off-network and not connected to the Internet. You can also configure the switch

connected directly only to the computer that you are using to configure it. That is, the

switch is not connected to the network and the Internet. We refer to this setup as

off-network.

Before you can access the full menu of the local browser UI, you must connect the switch

to a network with Internet access at least once so that you can register the switch with

Refresh Clicking the Refresh button refreshes the page with the latest information from the device.

Logout Clicking the Logout button ends the session.

Table 1. Command buttons in the local browser UI (continued)

Button Function

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual20

NETGEAR and unlock the full menu. Alternately, you can get a registration key, which you

can enter to unlock the full menu while the switch is off-network.

For more information, see the following sections:

•Register the switch on page 35.

•Access the switch off-network on page 32.

Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet

The DHCP client on the switch is enabled by default, allowing a DHCP server or router on the

network to assign an IP address to the switch.

If the switch is on-network, connected to a DHCP server, and connected to the Internet, use

one of the following methods to access the local browser UI of the switch and register the

switch with NETGEAR:

• Use a Windows-based computer to access the switch. See Use a Windows-based

computer to access the switch on-network on page 21.

• Use a Mac with Bonjour to access the switch. See Use a Mac with Bonjour to access

the switch on-network on page 23.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, use one of the following tools to discover the

IP address of the switch on the network:

• NETGEAR Insight app. You can install the NETGEAR Insight app on an iOS or Android

mobile device and discover the IP address of the switch. See Use the NETGEAR Insight

app to discover the IP address of the switch on page 25.

• NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool (SDT). If you use a Mac or a 64-bit Windows-based

computer, you can use the SDT to discover the switch on your network. See Use the

NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to discover the IP address of the switch on page 26.

• NETGEAR Smart Control Center (SCC). You can install the SCC on a Windows-based

computer. See one of the following sections:

•Discover the switch in a network with a DHCP server using the Smart Control

Center on page 27

•Discover the switch in a network without a DHCP server using the Smart Control

Center on page 28

• Other tools. You can also get the IP address of the switch from the DHCP server in the

network or use an IP scanner utility. See Use other options to discover the switch IP

address on page 30.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual21

When you know the IP address, you can configure the switch in the following ways:

• Local browser UI. For configuration of all switch features, access the switch over the

local browser UI. See Access the switch on-network when you know the switch IP

address on page 30.

• NETGEAR Smart Control Center (SCC). For configuration of a limited number of switch

features, use the SCC on a Windows-based computer. For more information, see the

SCC user manual, which you can download from netgear.com/support/product/SCC.

• NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud portal. You can change the management

mode of the switch so that you can use the NETGEAR Insight app and Insight Cloud

portal to manage the switch remotely. For more information, see Change the

management mode of the switch on page 41.

Use a Windows-based computer to access the switch

on-network

For the following procedure, the network must provide Internet access.

To use a Windows-based computer to determine the switch IP address and access the

switch on-network:

1. Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.

2. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

3. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.

4. Open Windows Explorer.

5. Click the Network link.

6. If prompted, enable the Network Discovery feature.

7. Under Network Infrastructure, locate the switch model number.

The model number can be GS728TPv2, GS728TPPv2, GS752TPv2, or GS752TPP.

8. Double-click GSmodel (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) (where GSmodel is the model number of your

switch and xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx is the MAC address of the switch).

The page that displays depends on whether you logged in before.

NETGEAR provides enhanced security by enforcing secure access and communication

between your web browser and the switch. Your browser might display a security

message that your connection is not private or not secure, or that a problem with the

security certificate occurred. If such as security message displays, you cannot proceed

but must take action. See the next step.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual22

9. If your browser displays a security message and does not let you proceed, do one of the

following, depending on the browser that you are using:

• Google Chrome. If Google Chrome displays a Your connection is not private

message, click the ADVANCED link. Then, click the Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe) link,

in which x.x.x.x represents the IP address of the switch.

• Apple Safari. If Apple Safari displays a This connection is not private message, click

the Show Details button. Then, click the visit this website link. If a warning pop-up

window opens, click the Visit Website button. If another pop-up window opens to let

you confirm changes to your certificate trust settings, enter your Mac user name and

password and click the Update Setting button.

• Mozilla Firefox. If Mozilla Firefox displays a Your connection is not secure message,

click the ADVANCED button. Then, click the Add Exception button. In the pop-up

window that opens, click the Confirm Security Exception button.

• Microsoft Internet Explorer. If Microsoft Internet Explorer displays a There is a

problem with this website’s security certificate message, click the Continue to this

website (not recommended) link.

• Microsoft Edge. If Microsoft Edge displays a There is a problem with this website’s

security certificate message or a similar warning, select Details > Go on to the

webpage.

Note: For information about installing a security certificate, see Use an HTTP

session to download and install an SSL security certificate file on the

switch.

10. Enter your credentials, which depend on the page that displays:

•Register to unlock all features page displays. If this is the first time that you log in

to the local browser UI, the Register to unlock all features page displays. Click the

the switch with your NETGEAR email address and password. You are only prompted

to do this once to confirm registration of your switch.

If you did not yet create a NETGEAR account, click the Create account link, follow

the directions onscreen to create an account, and register the switch with your

NETGEAR email address and password.

• Local Device Login page displays. If you previously logged in to the local browser UI

and already entered your NETGEAR email address and password, the Local Device

- Local device password. Enter the local device password.

The default local device password is password. The first time that you enter the

default local device password, the Change Default Password page displays,

requiring you to customize the local device password.

- Insight network password. If you previously logged in to the local browser UI,

you changed the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the

switch to an Insight network location, enter the Insight network password to access

the local browser UI.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual23

Note: After you add the switch to an Insight network location, the Insight

network password replaces the switch local device password.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

11. Click the Login button.

12. If the Change Default Password page displays, enter and confirm a new local device

password, and click the Submit button.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

Use a Mac with Bonjour to access the switch on-network

If your Mac supports Bonjour, you can use the following procedure. If you Mac does not

support Bonjour, see Use the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to discover the IP address of

the switch on page 26.

For the following procedure, the network must provide Internet access.

To use a Mac and web browser to access the switch that is connected to a network:

1. Cable the switch to a network with a router or DHCP server that manages IP addresses.

2. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

3. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired network connection.

4. Open the Safari browser.

5. Select Safari > Preferences.

The General page displays.

6. Click the Advanced tab.

The Advanced page displays.

7. Select the Include Bonjour in the Bookmarks Menu check box.

8. Close the Advanced page.

9. Select Bookmarks > Bonjour > GSmodel (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) (where GSmodel is the

model number of your switch and xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx is the MAC address of the switch), or

Bookmarks > Bonjour > Webpages GSmodel (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) depending on your

Mac OS version.

The page that displays depends on whether you logged in before.

NETGEAR provides enhanced security by enforcing secure access and communication

between your web browser and the switch. Your browser might display a security

message that your connection is not private or not secure, or that a problem with the

security certificate occurred. If such as security message displays, you cannot proceed

but must take action. See the next step.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual24

10. If your browser displays a security message and does not let you proceed, do one of the

following, depending on the browser that you are using:

• Google Chrome. If Google Chrome displays a Your connection is not private

message, click the ADVANCED link. Then, click the Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe) link,

in which x.x.x.x represents the IP address of the switch.

• Apple Safari. If Apple Safari displays a This connection is not private message, click

the Show Details button. Then, click the visit this website link. If a warning pop-up

window opens, click the Visit Website button. If another pop-up window opens to let

you confirm changes to your certificate trust settings, enter your Mac user name and

password and click the Update Setting button.

• Mozilla Firefox. If Mozilla Firefox displays a Your connection is not secure message,

click the ADVANCED button. Then, click the Add Exception button. In the pop-up

window that opens, click the Confirm Security Exception button.

• Microsoft Internet Explorer. If Microsoft Internet Explorer displays a There is a

problem with this website’s security certificate message, click the Continue to this

website (not recommended) link.

• Microsoft Edge. If Microsoft Edge displays a There is a problem with this website’s

security certificate message or a similar warning, select Details > Go on to the

webpage.

Note: For information about installing a security certificate, see Use an HTTP

session to download and install an SSL security certificate file on the

switch.

11. Enter your credentials, which depend on the page that displays:

•Register to unlock all features page displays. If this is the first time that you log in

to the local browser UI, the Register to unlock all features page displays. Click the

the switch with your NETGEAR email address and password. You are only prompted

to do this once to confirm registration of your switch.

If you did not yet create a NETGEAR account, click the Create account link, follow

the directions onscreen to create an account, and register the switch with your

NETGEAR email address and password.

• Local Device Login page displays. If you previously logged in to the local browser UI

and already entered your NETGEAR email address and password, the Local Device

- Local device password. Enter the local device password.

The default local device password is password. The first time that you enter the

default local device password, the Change Default Password page displays,

requiring you to customize the local device password.

- Insight network password. If you previously logged in to the local browser UI,

you changed the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the

switch to an Insight network location, enter the Insight network password to access

the local browser UI.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual25

Note: After you add the switch to an Insight network location, the Insight

network password replaces the switch local device password.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

12. Click the Login button.

13. If the Change Default Password page displays, enter and confirm a new local device

password, and click the Submit button.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

Use the NETGEAR Insight app to discover the IP address

of the switch

If the switch is connected to a WiFi router or access point, and the switch is connected to the

Internet, the NETGEAR Insight mobile app lets you discover the switch in your network.

Using the Netgear Insight app to discover the IP address of the switch in your network is not

the same as managing the switch with the Insight app or the Insight Cloud Portal.

Note: The default management mode of the switch is the local browser UI.

If you want to use the Insight app or the Insight Cloud Portal to

manage the switch, you first must change the management mode

(see Change the management mode to NETGEAR Insight Mobile

App and Insight Cloud Portal on page 42). After you do so, you can

manage the switch with Insight and add the switch to an Insight

network location.

To use the NETGEAR Insight app to discover the IP address of the switch in your

network:

1. On your iOS or Android mobile device, go to the app store, search for NETGEAR

Insight, download the latest version of the app, and install the app.

2. Connect your mobile device to the WiFi network of the WiFi router or access point to which

the switch is connected.

3. Open the NETGEAR Insight app.

4. If you did not set up a NETGEAR account, tap Create NETGEAR Account and follow the

onscreen instructions.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual26

5. Enter the email address and password for your account and tap LOG IN.

After you log in to your account, the IP address of the switch displays in the device list.

6. Write down the IP address for future use.

You can use this IP address to access the switch directly from a web browser. For

information about how to do this, see Access the switch on-network when you know the

switch IP address on page 30.

For more information about NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/insight and

netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base articles about NETGEAR

Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

Use the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to discover the IP

address of the switch

For easiest access, we recommend that you cable the switch to a network with a router or

DHCP server that assigns IP addresses, power on the switch, and then use a computer that

is connected to the same network as the switch.

The NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool lets you discover the switch in your network and

access the local browser UI of the switch from a Mac or a 64-bit Windows-based computer.

To install the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool and discover the IP address of the

switch in your network:

1. Download the Switch Discovery Tool by visiting

netgear.com/support/product/netgear-switch-discovery-tool.aspx.

Depending on the computer that you are using, download either the Mac version or the

version for a 64-bit Windows-based computer.

2. Temporarily disable the firewall, Internet security, antivirus programs, or all of these on the

computer that you use to configure the switch.

3. Unzip the Switch Discovery Tool files, double-click the .exe or .dmg file (for example,

NETGEAR+Switch+Discovery+Tool+Setup+1.2.102.exe or

NetgearSDT-V1.2.102.dmg), and install the program on your computer.

The installation process places a NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool icon on your

desktop.

4. Reenable the security services on your computer.

5. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

6. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection. The computer and the switch must be on the

same Layer 2 network.

7. Open the Switch Discovery Tool.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual27

To open the program, double-click the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool icon on your

desktop.

The initial page displays a menu and a button.

8. From the Choose a connection menu, select the network connection that allows the Switch

Discovery Tool to access the switch.

9. Click the Start Searching button.

The Switch Discovery Tool displays a list of Smart Managed Plus Switches that it

discovers on the selected network.

For each switch, the tool displays the IP address.

10. Write down the switch IP address assigned by the DHCP server.

For information about how to access the local browser UI of the switch, see Access the

switch on-network when you know the switch IP address on page 30.

Tip: After you complete the initial log-in process (see Register the switch

on page 35), you can access the local browser UI from the Switch

Discovery Tool by clicking the ADMIN PAGE button next to your

switch.

Discover the switch in a network with a DHCP server

using the Smart Control Center

This section describes how to set up your switch in a network that includes a DHCP server.

The DHCP client on the switch is enabled by default. When you connect the switch to your

network, the DHCP server automatically assigns an IP address to the switch. Use the Smart

Control Center (SCC) to discover the IP address automatically assigned to the switch.

For information about the SCC, visit https://www.netgear.com/support/product/SCC.

To install the switch in a network with a DHCP server:

1. Connect the switch to a network with a DHCP server.

2. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

3. Install the SCC on your computer.

4. Start the SCC.

5. Click the Discover button for the SCC to discover all the devices in the subnet.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual28

6. Write down the switch IP address assigned by the DHCP server.

For information about how to access the local browser UI of the switch, see Access the

switch on-network when you know the switch IP address on page 30.

Tip: After you complete the initial log-in process (see Register the switch

on page 35), you can access the local browser UI from the SCC by

selecting your switch in the SCC and clicking the

Web Browser Access button.

Discover the switch in a network without a DHCP server

using the Smart Control Center

This section describes how to use the Smart Control Center (SCC) to set up your switch in a

network without a DHCP server. If your network does not include a DHCP service, you must

assign a static IP address to your switch.

If you prefer, you can assign the switch a static IP address even if your network does include

a DHCP server.

As an offline option, if you connect your computer directly to the switch using an Ethernet

cable (that is, offline), you can also use the SCC to assign a static IP address to your switch.

After you do so, you can connect your switch to the network.

For more information about the SCC, see the SCC user manual, which you can download

from netgear.com/support/download/.

To assign a static IP address:

1. Connect the switch to your existing network or directly to your computer using an

Ethernet cable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual29

Note: If you connect your computer directly to the switch using an Ethernet

cable, the IP address settings of your computer do not need to be in

the same IP subnet as the switch. The SCC can detect the IP address

settings of the switch even if they are in a different subnet.

2. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

3. Install the SCC on your computer.

4. Start the SCC.

5. Click the Discover button for the SCC to find your switch.

The utility broadcasts Layer 2 discovery packets within the broadcast domain to discover

the switch.

6. Select the switch, and then click the Configure Device button.

The page expands to display additional fields at the bottom.

7. Select the Disabled radio button.

DHCP is disabled.

8. Enter the static switch IP address, gateway IP address, and subnet mask that you want to

assign for the switch.

9. Type the local device password to continue with the configuration change.

You must enter the local device password each time that you use the SCC to update the

switch settings. The default local device password is password.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

For information about how to access the local browser UI of the switch, see Access the

switch on-network when you know the switch IP address on page 30.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual30

Tip: After you complete the initial log-in process (see Register the switch on

page 35), you can access the local browser UI from the SCC by selecting

your switch in the SCC and clicking the Web Browser Access button.

Use other options to discover the switch IP address

If the switch is on-network, you can use one of the following options to determine the switch

IP address:

• Access the DHCP server. You can access the DHCP server (or router that functions as

a DHCP server) in your network and view the IP address that is assigned to the switch.

For more information, see the documentation for your DHCP server (or router).

• IP scanner utility. IP scanner utilities are available free of charge on the Internet. An IP

scanner utility lets you discover the IP address that is assigned to the switch.

For information about how to access the local browser UI of the switch, see Access the

switch on-network when you know the switch IP address on page 30.

Access the switch on-network when you know the switch IP

address

If the switch is on-network and you know the switch IP address, you can access the local

browser UI.

For the following procedure, the network must provide Internet access.

To access the switch on-network when you know the switch IP address:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

The page that displays depends on whether you logged in before.

NETGEAR provides enhanced security by enforcing secure access and communication

between your web browser and the switch. Your browser might display a security

message that your connection is not private or not secure, or that a problem with the

security certificate occurred. If such as security message displays, you cannot proceed

but must take action. See the next step.

3. If your browser displays a security message and does not let you proceed, do one of the

following, depending on the browser that you are using:

• Google Chrome. If Google Chrome displays a Your connection is not private

message, click the ADVANCED link. Then, click the Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe) link,

in which x.x.x.x represents the IP address of the switch.

• Apple Safari. If Apple Safari displays a This connection is not private message, click

the Show Details button. Then, click the visit this website link. If a warning pop-up

window opens, click the Visit Website button. If another pop-up window opens to let

you confirm changes to your certificate trust settings, enter your Mac user name and

password and click the Update Setting button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual31

• Mozilla Firefox. If Mozilla Firefox displays a Your connection is not secure message,

click the ADVANCED button. Then, click the Add Exception button. In the pop-up

window that opens, click the Confirm Security Exception button.

• Microsoft Internet Explorer. If Microsoft Internet Explorer displays a There is a

problem with this website’s security certificate message, click the Continue to this

website (not recommended) link.

• Microsoft Edge. If Microsoft Edge displays a There is a problem with this website’s

security certificate message or a similar warning, select Details > Go on to the

webpage.

Note: For information about installing a security certificate, see Use an HTTP

session to download and install an SSL security certificate file on the

switch.

4. Enter your credentials, which depend on the page that displays:

•Register to unlock all features page displays. If this is the first time that you log in

to the local browser UI, the Register to unlock all features page displays. Click the

prompted to do this once to confirm registration of your switch.

If you did not yet create a NETGEAR account, click the Create account link, follow

the directions onscreen to create an account, and register the switch with your

NETGEAR email address and password.

• Local Device Login page displays. If you previously logged in to the local browser UI

and already entered your NETGEAR email address and password, the Local Device

- Local device password. Enter the local device password.

The default local device password is password. The first time that you enter the

default local device password, the Change Default Password page displays,

requiring you to customize the local device password.

- Insight network password. If you previously logged in to the local browser UI,

you changed the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the

switch to an Insight network location, enter the Insight network password to access

the local browser UI.

Note: After you add the switch to an Insight network location, the Insight

network password replaces the switch local device password.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

6. If the Change Default Password page displays, enter and confirm a new local device

password, and click the Submit button.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual32

Access the switch off-network

If the switch is off-network and not connected to the Internet, before you can unlock the full

menu of the local browser UI, you must do one of the following:

•Connect the switch to a network with Internet access at least once so that you can

•Get a registration key.

For more information about these registration options, see Register the switch on page 35.

The default IP address of the switch is 192.168.0.239. The IP address of the computer that

you use to access the switch off-network must in the same subnet as the default IP address

of the switch.

To access the switch off-network and not connected to the Internet after you

registered the switch with NETGEAR or obtained a registration key:

1. Change the IP settings of your computer to be in the same subnet as the IP settings of

the switch.

If the DHCP client of the switch is enabled and you remove the switch from the network

with the DHCP server, the IP address reverts to the default IP address of 192.168.0.239

with a subnet of 255.255.255.0.

Note: If you already disabled the DHCP client and assigned a static IP

address to the switch, change the IP settings of your computer to be in

the same subnet as the static IP address.

For more information about changing the IP settings on your computer, see one of the

following knowledge base articles at the NETGEAR website:

•Windows-based computer. See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/27476/How-to-set-a-static-IP-address-in-Windows

• Mac. See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/000037250/Setting-a-static-IP-address-on-your-network-a

dapter-in-Mac-OS-for-direct-access-to-an-access-point

(The Mac article is written for an access point but is also valid for a switch.)

2. Connect your computer to the switch using an Ethernet cable.

3. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

4. Launch a web browser.

5. Open a web browser, and enter http://192.168.0.239.

This is the default IP address of the switch. If you already disabled the DHCP client and

assigned a static IP address to the switch, enter the static IP address of the switch.

The Local Device Login page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual33

Note: NETGEAR provides enhanced security by enforcing secure access

and communication between your web browser and the switch. Your

browser might display a security message that your connection is not

private or not secure, or that a problem with the security certificate

occurred. If such as security message displays, you cannot proceed

but must take action. See the next step.

6. If your browser displays a security message and does not let you proceed, do one of the

following, depending on the browser that you are using:

• Google Chrome. If Google Chrome displays a Your connection is not private

message, click the ADVANCED link. Then, click the Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe) link,

in which x.x.x.x represents the IP address of the switch.

• Apple Safari. If Apple Safari displays a This connection is not private message, click

the Show Details button. Then, click the visit this website link. If a warning pop-up

window opens, click the Visit Website button. If another pop-up window opens to let

you confirm changes to your certificate trust settings, enter your Mac user name and

password and click the Update Setting button.

• Mozilla Firefox. If Mozilla Firefox displays a Your connection is not secure message,

click the ADVANCED button. Then, click the Add Exception button. In the pop-up

window that opens, click the Confirm Security Exception button.

• Microsoft Internet Explorer. If Microsoft Internet Explorer displays a There is a

problem with this website’s security certificate message, click the Continue to this

website (not recommended) link.

• Microsoft Edge. If Microsoft Edge displays a There is a problem with this website’s

security certificate message or a similar warning, select Details > Go on to the

webpage.

Note: For information about installing a security certificate, see Use an HTTP

session to download and install an SSL security certificate file on the

switch.

7. Enter one of the following credentials:

•Local device password. Enter the local device password.

The default local device password is password. The first time that you enter the

default local device password, the Change Default Password page displays, requiring

you to customize the local device password.

• Insight network password. If you previously logged in to the local browser UI, you

changed the management mode to NETGEAR Insight, and you added the switch to an

Insight network location, enter the Insight network password to access the local

browser UI.

Note: After you add the switch to an Insight network location, the Insight

network password replaces the switch local device password.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual34

• Registration key. If you obtained a registration key, enter it. For more information,

see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and get a registration key for

offline access on page 38).

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

8. If you enter a password, click the Login button. If you enter a registration key, click the

Submit button.

9. If the Change Default Password page displays, enter and confirm a new local device

password, and click the Submit button.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

10. After you complete the configuration of the switch, reconfigure the computer that you used

for this process to its original TCP/IP settings.

You can now connect your switch to your network using an Ethernet cable.

Credentials for the local browser UI

The information in this section applies to accessing the switch local browser UI in either

management mode. That is, it does not apply to accessing the NETGEAR Insight app and

Cloud portal.

Note: Until you register and access the switch with your NETGEAR account

or obtain and enter a registration key, you can access only a limited

menu of the local browser UI. This limitation applies to either

management mode.

To access the local browser UI, and depending on your situation, use one of the following

credentials:

• NETGEAR account credentials.

When you access the local browser UI for the first time, you can register the switch by

entering your NETGEAR account credentials and unlock the full menu of the local

browser UI (see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and access the switch

online on page 36). If you do not own a free NETGEAR account, you can create one.

Alternatively, you can obtain a registration key and enter the key to unlock the full menu of

the local browser UI (see Register the switch with your NETGEAR account and get a

registration key for offline access on page 38).

• Local device password.

After you register the switch with your NETGEAR account, you can access the full menu

of the local browser UI with your local device password. The first time that you access the

local browser UI, you can enter the default password as the local device password, but

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual35

you are then required to customize the password for increased security. Subsequent

times that you log in to the local browser UI, use your customized local device password.

• NETGEAR Insight network location password.

NETGEAR Insight can affect how you access the switch local browser UI. If you add the

switch to an Insight network location (this process is referred to as claiming), the switch is

automatically registered to your NETGEAR account. After you add the switch to an

Insight network location, the Insight network location password replaces the switch local

device password. To access the local browser UI, you must enter the Insight network

location password. For information about how the Insight network password functions,

visit netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base articles about

NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

However, if you use the NETGEAR Insight app to discover the IP address of the switch in

your physical network but do not claim the switch by adding it to an Insight network

location, the switch is registered only after you access the switch local browser UI with

your NETGEAR account credentials. After you do so, you can access the full menu of the

local browser UI with your local device password.

The following table lists the essential credential options for access to the local browser UI.

Table 3. Credentials for access to the local browser UI

Management mode Registered Added to an

Insight network

Credentials Local browser UI

Default mode:

Direct Connect Web

Browser Interface (Local

LAN Only)

No N/A Local device password Limited menu

Yes No Local device password Full menu

Yes Yes Insight network password Full menu

NETGEAR Insight Mobile

App and Insight Cloud

Portal (Cloud/Remote)

No N/A Local device password Limited menu

Yes No Local device password Limited menu

Yes Yes Insight network password Limited menu

You only need to register and access the switch local browser UI once with your NETGEAR

account. After you do so, you can access the local browser UI with the local device

password, or if you previously added the switch to an Insight network, with the Insight

network password. For more information, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual36

You can use one the following methods to register the switch and unlock the full menu of the

local browser UI:

• Online registration for on-network access. If your switch is on-network or connected to

the Internet, you can access the full menu of the local browser UI after you register the

switch with your NETGEAR account credentials. During the registration process, the

switch contacts a NETGEAR server. For more information, see Register the switch with

your NETGEAR account and access the switch online on page 36.

• Preregistration for off-network access. You can preregister your switch from any

device that is connected to the Internet and get a registration key. If the switch is

off-network or not connected to the Internet, you can enter the registration key to unlock

the full menu of the local browser UI. For more information, see Register the switch with

your NETGEAR account and get a registration key for offline access on page 38.

Note: You can use the NETGEAR Insight app to register the switch, get a

registration key, access the switch off-network, and unlock the full menu

of the local browser UI. For more information, visit netgear.com/support,

and see the knowledge base articles about NETGEAR Insight.

access the switch online

For initial registration and access with your NETGEAR account, the switch must be

connected to the Internet so that it can communicate with a NETGEAR server.

If you do not own a free NETGEAR account, you can create one during the registration

process.

To register and access the switch online over the local browser UI with your NETGEAR

account:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Register to unlock all features page displays.

Note: NETGEAR provides enhanced security by enforcing secure access

and communication between your web browser and the switch. Your

browser might display a security message that your connection is not

private or not secure, or that a problem with the security certificate

occurred. If such as security message displays, you cannot proceed

but must take action. See the next step.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual37

4. If your browser displays a security message and does not let you proceed, do one of the

following, depending on the browser that you are using:

• Google Chrome. If Google Chrome displays a Your connection is not private

message, click the ADVANCED link. Then, click the Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe) link,

in which x.x.x.x represents the IP address of the switch.

• Apple Safari. If Apple Safari displays a This connection is not private message, click

the Show Details button. Then, click the visit this website link. If a warning pop-up

window opens, click the Visit Website button. If another pop-up window opens to let

you confirm changes to your certificate trust settings, enter your Mac user name and

password and click the Update Setting button.

• Mozilla Firefox. If Mozilla Firefox displays a Your connection is not secure message,

click the ADVANCED button. Then, click the Add Exception button. In the pop-up

window that opens, click the Confirm Security Exception button.

• Microsoft Internet Explorer. If Microsoft Internet Explorer displays a There is a

problem with this website’s security certificate message, click the Continue to this

website (not recommended).

• Microsoft Edge. If Microsoft Edge displays a There is a problem with this website’s

security certificate message or a similar warning, select Details > Go on to the

webpage.

Note: For information about installing a security certificate, see Use an HTTP

session to download and install an SSL security certificate file on the

switch on page 508.

5. Click the Log in with NETGEAR account button and follow the directions onscreen to

You are only prompted to do this once to confirm registration of your switch.

If you did not yet create a NETGEAR account, click the Create account link, follow the

directions onscreen to create an account, and register the switch with your NETGEAR

email address and password.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

6. Click the Login button.

7. If the Change Default Password page displays, enter and confirm a new local device

password, and click the Submit button.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual38

registration key for offline access

After you register your switch with NETGEAR, you can get a registration key, access the

switch offline or not connected to the Internet, an unlock full access to the local browser UI.

This procedure describes how you can visit mynetgear.com, log in to your NETGEAR

account, register the switch using its serial number, and get a registration key.

You can also use the NETGEAR Insight app to get a registration key. NETGEAR Insight

Premium or Pro subscribers can use the Insight Cloud Portal to get a registration key. For

information about how the registration key functions with Insight, visit

netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base articles about NETGEAR

Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

To register the switch with your NETGEAR account, get a registration key, and access

the switch offline over the local browser UI:

1. From a computer or mobile device that is connected to the Internet, go to

mynetgear.com.

2. Log in to your NETGEAR account.

If you do not own a free NETGEAR account, you can create one.

3. From the menu on the left, select Register a Product.

The page adjusts.

4. In the Serial Number field, enter the serial number of the switch.

The serial number consists of 13 digits. The serial number is usually printed on a label on

the bottom or the back panel of the switch.

5. Click the Register button.

The switch is registered with NETGEAR.

6. If the My Products does not display, click My Products from the menu.

The page adjusts.

7. Select the radio button for the newly registered switch, and click the VIEW REGISTRATION

KEY button.

The registration key is displayed, and an email with the registration key is sent to your

NETGEAR account email address.

8. Change the IP settings of your computer to be in the same subnet as the IP settings of the

switch.

If the DHCP client of the switch is enabled and you remove the switch from the network

with the DHCP server, the IP address reverts to the default IP address of 192.168.0.239

with a subnet of 255.255.255.0.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual39

Note: If you already disabled the DHCP client and assigned a static IP

address to the switch, change the IP settings of your computer to be in

the same subnet as the static IP address.

For more information about changing the IP settings on your computer, see one of the

following knowledge base articles at the NETGEAR website:

•Windows-based computer. See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/27476/How-to-set-a-static-IP-address-in-Windows

• Mac. See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/000037250/Setting-a-static-IP-address-on-your-network-a

dapter-in-Mac-OS-for-direct-access-to-an-access-point

(The Mac article is written for an access point but is also valid for a switch.)

9. Connect your computer to the switch using an Ethernet cable.

10. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

11. Launch a web browser.

12. Open a web browser, and enter http://192.168.0.239.

This is the default IP address of the switch. If you already disabled the DHCP client and

assigned a static IP address to the switch, enter the static IP address of the switch.

The Local Device Login page displays.

Note: NETGEAR provides enhanced security by enforcing secure access

and communication between your web browser and the switch. Your

browser might display a security message that your connection is not

private or not secure, or that a problem with the security certificate

occurred. If such as security message displays, you cannot proceed

but must take action. See the next step.

13. If your browser displays a security message and does not let you proceed, do one of the

following, depending on the browser that you are using:

• Google Chrome. If Google Chrome displays a Your connection is not private

message, click the ADVANCED link. Then, click the Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe) link,

in which x.x.x.x represents the IP address of the switch.

• Apple Safari. If Apple Safari displays a This connection is not private message, click

the Show Details button. Then, click the visit this website link. If a warning pop-up

window opens, click the Visit Website button. If another pop-up window opens to let

you confirm changes to your certificate trust settings, enter your Mac user name and

password and click the Update Setting button.

• Mozilla Firefox. If Mozilla Firefox displays a Your connection is not secure message,

click the ADVANCED button. Then, click the Add Exception button. In the pop-up

window that opens, click the Confirm Security Exception button.

• Microsoft Internet Explorer. If Microsoft Internet Explorer displays a There is a

problem with this website’s security certificate message, click the Continue to this

website (not recommended).

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual40

• Microsoft Edge. If Microsoft Edge displays a There is a problem with this website’s

security certificate message or a similar warning, select Details > Go on to the

webpage.

Note: For information about installing a security certificate, see Use an HTTP

session to download and install an SSL security certificate file on the

switch on page 508.

14. Enter the registration key.

15. Click the Submit button.

16. If the Change Default Password page displays, enter and confirm a new local device

password, and click the Submit button.

The System Information page displays. You can now configure the switch.

17. After you complete the configuration of the switch, reconfigure the computer that you used

for this process to its original TCP/IP settings.

You can now connect your switch to your network using an Ethernet cable.

Change the language of the local

browser UI

By default, the language is set to Auto. You can set the language to a specific one.

To change the language of the local browser UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual41

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. At the top of the page, to the left of Welcome, select a language from the language menu.

A confirmation pop-up window opens.

7. Click the OK button.

You are logged out. The language of the local browser UI is set to the language that you

selected.

To continue configuring the switch, log in again.

Change the management mode of the

switch

By default, the management mode on the switch is Directly Connect to Web Browser

Interface (which is the same as the local browser UI). You can also change the management

mode to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal.

About changing the management mode

The following applies to changing the management mode:

• Changing to the NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal mode.

-The first time that you enable this mode, the switch is reset to its factory default

settings so that you can create the switch configuration and network topology using

the Insight app or the Insight Cloud portal.

-If you previously added the switch to a network location on the Insight app or Insight

Cloud portal, all Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last

configuration saved on the cloud server, including the switch password (that is, the

password is reset to the Insight network password).

-If you use the Insight app or the Insight Cloud portal, you can temporarily change the

management mode of the switch back to Directly Connect to Web Browser Interface.

You can then access the local browser UI for settings that are not

Insight-manageable, for complex tasks such as integrating with an existing network of

devices that are not managed through Insight, and for debugging purposes. When

you are done, you can change the management mode back to NETGEAR Insight

Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual42

• Changing back to Directly Connect to Web Browser Interface mode.

-The NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal management mode is

disabled and the current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud

server.

-Any changes that you make using the Directly Connect to Web Browser Interface

management mode are not saved to the cloud server.

-You must continue to use the Insight network password (for the last Insight network

location) to access the local browser UI until you manually change the local device

password.

Change the management mode to NETGEAR Insight

Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal

To change the management mode of the switch to NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and

Insight Cloud portal:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select the NETGEAR Insight Mobile App and Insight Cloud Portal radio button.

An Alert pop-up window opens.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual43

7. Read the text, and click the OK button.

The pop-up window closes.

8. Click the Apply button.

Another pop-up window opens.

9. Click the OK button.

The pop-up window closes, the System Information page closes, and your settings are

saved.

The following occurs:

•The first time that you enable this mode, the switch is reset to its factory default

settings.

•The switch connects to the cloud server.

•If you previously added the switch to a network location on the Insight app or Insight

Cloud portal, all Insight-manageable device settings are returned to the last

configuration saved on the cloud server, including the switch password (that is, the

password is reset to the Insight network password).

•The Local Device Login page might display again. (You can close the page.)

You can now manage the switch using the Insight app or Insight Cloud portal.

For more information about NETGEAR Insight, visit netgear.com/insight and

netgear.com/support/product/Insight.aspx. For knowledge base articles about NETGEAR

Insight, visit netgear.com/support.

Change the management mode back to Directly Connect

to Web-browser Interface

To change the management mode of the switch back to Directly Connect to Web

Browser Interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual44

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select the Directly Connect to Web Browser Interface radio button.

An Alert pop-up window opens.

7. Read the text, and click the OK button.

The pop-up window closes.

8. Click the Apply button.

Another pop-up window opens.

9. Click the OK button.

The pop-up window closes, the System Information page closes, and your settings are

saved. Any current Insight-manageable device settings are saved to the cloud server.

The Local Device Login page displays.

10. Log in again.

The System Information page displays and the full menu of the local browser UI is now

available.

Use the Device View of the local browser UI

The Device View displays the ports on the switch. This graphic tool provides an alternate way

to navigate to configuration and monitoring options. The graphic tool also provides

information about device ports, configuration and status, tables, and feature components.

To use the Device View:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual45

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Device View.

The Device View page displays.

The following figure shows the Device View page for model GS728TPPv2.

The system LEDs display on the left side on the Device View page.

Depending upon the status of the port, the port color on the Device View page is either

green or black:

•Green indicates that the port is linking up.

•Black indicates that no link is present.

Each port also provides one LED on the Device View page to indicate the link status of

the port:

•A green LED indicates that the port is linking at a speed of 1 Gbps.

•A yellow LED indicates that the port is linking at a speed of 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.

7. To display a port menu that shows configuration and statistics options, click a port.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual46

You can select a menu option to access the page that contains the configuration or

monitoring options.

8. To display the main menu, right-click the switch graphic but do not right-click a specific port.

The menu contains the same options as the navigation tabs at the top of the page. You

can select a menu option to access the page that contains the configuration or monitoring

options.

The following figure shows the details on the Device View page for model GS728TPPv2.

Power LED in the Device View

The Power LED in the Device View is a bicolor LED that serves as an indicator of power and

diagnostic status:

• Solid green. The power is supplied to the switch and operating normally.

Fan LED in the Device View

The Fan LED in the Device View indicates the following status:

• Solid yellow. The fan is faulty.

•Off. The fan is operating normally.

PoE Max LED in the Device View

For models GS110TPv3 and GS110TPP, the PoE Max LED in the Device View indicates the

following status:

• Off. Sufficient (more than 7W of) PoE power is available.

• Solid yellow. Less than 7W of PoE power is available.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual47

Note: The physical PoE Max LED on the switch can also blink yellow,

indicating that at least once during the previous two minutes, less

than 7W of PoE power was available.

LED Mode LED in the Device View

The LED Mode LED indicates if the port LEDs function in Ethernet Mode or PoE Mode:

• Solid green. The port LEDs function in Ethernet Mode and indicate switching information

(link, speed, and activity).

• Solid yellow. The port LEDs function in PoE Mode and indicate PoE information

(PoE-powered or PoE fault).

Note: The LED Mode button on the switch front panel lets you switch

between Ethernet Mode and PoE Mode.

Configure interface settings

The switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and

the interface number. The physical ports are Gigabit interfaces and are numbered on the

front panel. You configure the logical interfaces by using the software.

The following table describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch.

Table 4. Naming conventions for interfaces

Interface Description Example

Physical The physical ports are Gigabit Ethernet

interfaces and are numbered sequentially

starting from 1.

g1, g2, g12

Link aggregation group (LAG) LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are

used only for bridging functions.

l1, l2, l3

CPU management interface This is the internal switch interface that

determines the switch base MAC address. This

interface is not configurable and is always listed

in the MAC Address Table.

Routing VLAN interfaces This is an interface used for routing functionality. VLAN 1, VLAN 2, VLAN 3

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual48

For some features that allow you to configure interface settings, you can apply the same

settings simultaneously to any of the following:

•A single port

•Multiple ports

•All ports

•A single LAG

•Multiple LAGs

•All LAGs

•Multiple ports and LAGs

•All ports and LAGs

Many of the pages that allow you to configure or view interface settings include links to

display all ports, all LAGs, or all ports and LAGs on the page.

Use these links as follows:

•To display all ports, click the 1 link.

•To display all LAGs, click the LAGS link.

•To display all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

The procedures in this section describe how to select the ports and LAGs to configure. The

procedures assume that you are already logged in to the switch. If you do not know how to

page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

To configure a single port by using the Go To Interface field:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying all ports, and not only the LAGs.

2. In the Go To Interface field, type the port number.

For example, type g4.

For more information, see Table 4, Naming conventions for interfaces on page 47.

3. Click the Go button.

The check box associated with the interface is selected, the row for the selected interface

is highlighted, and the interface number displays in the heading row.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual49

4. Configure the desired settings.

5. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure a single LAG by using the Go To Interface field:

1. Click the LAG link or the All link to display the LAGs.

2. In the Go To Interface field, type the LAG number, for example l3.

For more information, see Table 4, Naming conventions for interfaces on page 47.

3. Click the Go button.

The check box associated with the interface is selected, the row for the selected interface

is highlighted, and the interface number appears in the heading row.

4. Configure the desired settings.

5. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure a single port:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying all ports, and not only the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to the port number.

The row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number appears in the

heading row.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure a single LAG:

1. Click the LAG link or the All link to display the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to the LAG number.

The row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number appears in the

heading row.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual50

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure multiple ports:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying all ports, and not only the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to each port to configure.

The row for each selected interface is highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure multiple LAGs:

1. Click the LAG link or the All link to display the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to each LAG to configure.

The check box associated with each interface is selected, and the row for each selected

interface is highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all ports:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying only ports, and not LAGs.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check boxes for all ports are selected and the rows for all ports are highlighted.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual51

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all LAGs:

1. Click the LAG link to display only the LAG interfaces.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check box associated with every LAG is selected, and the rows for all LAGs are

highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure multiple ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box associated with each port and LAG to configure.

The rows for the selected ports and LAGs are highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check box associated with every port and LAG is selected, and the rows for all ports

and LAGs are highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual52

Access the NETGEAR support website

From the local browser UI, you can access the NETGEAR support website at

netgear.com/support.

To access the support website from the local browser UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Help > Support.

The Support page displays.

7. To access the NETGEAR support site for the switch, click the Apply button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Get Started User Manual53

Access the user manual online

The user manual (the guide you are now reading) is available at the NETGEAR download

center at netgear.com/support/download/.

To access the user manual online from the local browser UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

3. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Help > Online Help > User Guide.

The User Guide page displays.

6. To access the NETGEAR download center, click the Apply button.

Enter the model number of the switch.

2Configure System Information

This chapter contains the following sections:

•View or define system information

•Configure the IP network settings for management access

•Configure the time settings

•Configure denial of service settings

•Configure DNS settings

•Configure green Ethernet settings

•Use the Device View

•Configure Power over Ethernet

•Configure SNMP

•Configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol

•Configure a DHCP L2 relay

•Configure DHCP snooping

•Configure Dynamic ARP Inspection

•Set up PoE timer schedules

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual55

View or define system information

When you log in, the System Information page displays. You can configure and view general

device information.

To view or define system information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login. You must change this password at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual56

6. Define the following fields:

• System Name. Enter the name to identify this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

• System Location. Enter the location of this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

• System Contact. Enter the contact person for this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the status information that the System Information page

displays.

Table 5. System Information

Field Description

Product Name The product name of this switch.

Serial Number The serial number of the switch.

System Object OID The base object ID for the switch's enterprise MIB.

Date & Time The current date and time.

System Up Time The time in days, hours, and minutes since the last switch reboot.

Base Mac Address Universally assigned hardware address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual57

View the fan status

You can view the status of the fans in all units. These fans remove the heat generated by the

power, CPU, and other components, and allow the switch to function normally.

To view the fan status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login. You must change this password at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Scroll down to the Fans section.

7. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fan status information.

Table 6. Fan status

Field Description

FAN The fan index used to identify the fan for the switch.

Description The description of the temperature sensor.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual58

View the power supply information

You can view s the status of the power supplies.

To view the power supplies status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login. You must change this password at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Scroll down to the Power supplies section.

Type Specifies whether the fan module is fixed or removable.

Speed The fan speed.

Duty level(%) The duty level of the fan.

State Specifies whether the fan is operational.

Table 6. Fan status (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual59

7. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Power supplies information.

Table 7. Power supplies status

Field Description

Power supply The power supply index used for the unit.

Description The description of the power supply.

Type Specifies whether the power module is fixed or removable.

State Specifies the state of the power module.

View the software versions

You can view the software versions that are running on the switch.

To view the software versions:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login. You must change this password at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Scroll down to the Versions section.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual60

7. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Versions

section of the System Information page.

Table 8. Versions information

Field Description

Model Name The model name of the switch.

Boot Version The version of the bootloader software of the switch.

Software Version The version number of the code currently running on the switch.

View the system CPU status

You can monitor the CPU, memory resources, and utilization patterns across various

intervals to assess the performance, load, and stability.

To view the system CPU status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual61

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > System CPU Status.

The CPU Utilization section shows the memory information, task-related information, and

percentage of CPU utilization per task.

The following table describes CPU Memory Status information.

Table 9. CPU Memory Status information

Field Description

Total System Memory The total memory of the switch in KBytes.

Available Memory The available memory space for the switch in KBytes.

Configure the CPU thresholds

The CPU Utilization Threshold notification feature allows you to configure thresholds that,

when exceeded, trigger a notification. The notification occurs through SNMP trap and syslog

messages.

To configure the CPU thresholds:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual62

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > CPU Threshold.

7. Specify the thresholds:

• Rising Threshold. Notification is generated when the total CPU utilization exceeds

this threshold value over the configured time period. The range is 1 to 100.

•Rising Interval. This utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 to

86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

•Falling Threshold. Notification is triggered when the total CPU utilization falls below

this level for a configured period of time.

The falling utilization threshold must be equal to or less than the rising threshold

value. The falling utilization threshold notification is sent only if a rising threshold

notification was sent previously. Configuring the falling utilization threshold and time

period is optional. If the Falling CPU utilization settings are not configured, the

settings automatically get the same values as the Rising CPU utilization settings. The

range is 1 to 100.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual63

• Falling Interval. The utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5

seconds to 86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

• Free Memory Threshold. The free memory threshold value for the CPU in KB.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View USB device information

You can display the USB device status, memory statistics, and directory details.

The limitations for the USB device supported on the switch are as follows:

•The USB disk must comply with the USB 2.0 standard.

•The USB disk must be file type FAT32 or VFAT. File type NTFS is not supported.

To display the USB device information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > USB Device Information.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual64

The Device Status field displays the current status of the device. The status is one of the

following:

• Active. The device is USB plugged in and recognized by the switch.

• Inactive. The device is not mounted.

• Invalid. The device is not present or an invalid device is plugged in.

7. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the USB Memory Statistics information.

Table 10. USB Memory Statistics information

Field Description

Total Size The USB flash device storage size in bytes.

Bytes Used The size of memory used on the USB flash device.

Bytes Free The size of memory free on the USB flash device.

The following table describes the USB Directory Details information.

Table 11. USB directory details information

Field Description

File Name The name of the file stored in the USB flash drive.

File Size The size, in bytes, of the file stored in the USB flash drive.

Modification Time The last modification time of the file stored in the USB flash drive.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual65

Configure the IP network settings for

management access

You can configure network information for the local browser UI, which is the logical interface

used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front-panel ports.

The settings associated with the local browser UI do not affect the configuration of the front

panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed.

Configure the IPv4 network and VLAN settings for the

local browser UI

You can configure the IPv4 network information for the local browser UI, which is the logical

interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front-panel

ports.

To configure the IPv4 network and VLAN settings for the local browser UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual66

6. Select the appropriate radio button to determine how to configure the network information for

the switch management interface:

• Dynamic IP Address (DHCP). Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address

through a DHCP server.

•Dynamic IP Address (BOOTP). Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address

through a BootP server.

• Static IP Address. Specifies that the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway

must be manually configured. Enter this information in the fields below this radio

button.

7. If you selected the Static IP Address radio button, configure the following network

information:

• IP Address. The IP address of the network interface. The default value is

192.168.0.239. Each part of the IP address must start with a number other than zero.

For example, IP addresses 001.100.192.6 and 192.001.10.3 are not valid.

• Subnet Mask. The IP subnet mask for the interface. The default value is

255.255.255.0.

• Default Gateway. The default gateway for the IP interface. The default value is

192.168.0.254.

8. Specify the VLAN ID for the management VLAN.

The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a

workstation that is connected to a port in the same VLAN. If not specified, the active

management VLAN ID is 1 (default), which allows an IP connection to be established

through any port.

When the management VLAN is set to a different value, an IP connection can be made

only through a port that is part of the management VLAN. Also, the port VLAN ID (PVID)

of the port to be connected in that management VLAN must be the same as the

management VLAN ID.

Note: Make sure that the VLAN that must be the management VLAN exists.

Also make sure that the PVID of at least one port in the VLAN is the

same as the management VLAN ID. For information about creating

VLANs and configuring the PVID for a port, see Configure VLANs on

page 169.

The following requirements apply to the management VLAN:

•Only one management VLAN can be active at a time.

•When a new management VLAN is configured, connectivity through the existing

management VLAN is lost.

•The management station must be reconnected to the port in the new management

VLAN.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual67

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the IPv6 network settings for the local browser

interface

You can configure IPv6 network information for the local browser UI, which is the logical

interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front-panel

ports.

To access the switch over an IPv6 network, you must initially configure the switch with IPv6

information (an IPv6 prefix, prefix length, and default gateway). You can configure IPv6 using

one of the following options:

•IPv6 auto-configuration

•DHCPv6

When in-band connectivity is established, IPv6 information can be changed using

SNMP-based management or web-based management.

To configure the IPv6 network settings for the local browser UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual68

6. Select System > Management > IPv6 Network Configuration.

The IPv6 Network Global Configuration page displays.

7. Ensure that the Admin Mode Enable radio button is selected.

8. Determine how the switch acquires an IPv6 address:

• IPv6 Address Auto Configuration Mode. When this mode is enabled, the network

interface can acquire an IPv6 address through IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol

(NDP) and through the use of router advertisement messages. When this mode is

disabled, the network interface does not use the native IPv6 address

auto-configuration features to acquire an IPv6 address. Auto-configuration can be

enabled only when DHCPv6 is not enabled on any of the management interfaces.

• DHCPv6. Next to Current Network Configuration Protocol, select the DHCPv6 radio

button to enable the DHCPv6 client on the interface. The switch attempts to acquire

network information from a DHCPv6 server. Selecting the None radio button disables

the DHCPv6 client on the network interface. When DHCPv6 is enabled, the DHCPv6

Client DUID field displays the client identifier used by the DHCPv6 client (if enabled)

when sending messages to the DHCPv6 server.

9. In the IPv6 Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the IPv6 network interface.

The gateway address is in IPv6 global or link-local address format.

10. To configure one or more static IPv6 addresses for the management interface, do the

following:

a. In the IPv6 Prefix/Prefix Length field, specify the static IPv6 prefix and prefix to the

IPv6 network interface.

The address is in the global address format.

b. In the EUI64 menu, select True to enable the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI)

flag for IPv6 address, or select False to omit the EUI flag.

c. Click the Add button.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the IPv6 network neighbors

You can view information about the IPv6 neighbors that the switch discovered through the

network interface by using the Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP).

To view the IPv6 Network Neighbor Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual69

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > IPv6 Network Neighbor.

The following table describes the information the IPv6 Network Neighbor page displays about

each IPv6 neighbor that the switch discovered.

Table 12. IPv6 network interface neighbor table information

Field Description

IPv6 address The IPv6 address of a neighbor switch visible to the network interface.

MAC address The MAC address of a neighbor switch.

IsRtr

Neighbor State The state of the neighboring switch:

Last Updated The last sysUpTime that this neighbor was updated.

• true (1). The neighbor machine is a router.

• false (2). The neighbor machine is not a router.

• reachable (1). The neighbor is reachable by this switch.

• stale (2). Information about the neighbor is scheduled for deletion.

• delay (3). No information was received from the neighbor during

the delay period.

• probe (4). The switch is attempting to probe for this neighbor.

• unknown (5). Unknown status.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual70

Configure the time settings

The switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). As its name suggests, it is a

less complicated version of Network Time Protocol, which is a system for synchronizing the

clocks of networked computer systems, primarily when data transfer is handled through the

Internet. You can also set the system time manually.

Configure the time setting manually

You can view and adjust date and time settings.

To manually configure the time setting:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual71

7. Select the Clock Source Local radio button.

8. In the Date field, specify the current date in months, days, and years (MM/DD/YYYY).

9. In the Time field, specify the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds (HH:MM:SS).

Note: If you do not enter a date and time, the switch calculates the date and

time using the CPU’s clock cycle.

10. In the Time Zone Name field, specify a time zone.

In the Offset Hours and Offset Minutes fields, you can also specify the number of hours

and number of minutes that the time zone is different from the Coordinated Universal

Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the display of the current system time. The default

value is UTC.

11. In the Offset Hours field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different from

UTC.

The allowed range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

12. In the Offset Minutes field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is different

from UTC.

The allowed range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the time settings with SNTP and configure the

global SNTP settings

To configure the time by using SNTP and configure the global SNTP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual72

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

7. Select the Clock Source SNTP radio button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual73

The page refreshes and displays the SNTP Global Configuration section, the SNTP

Global Status section, and the SNTP GLobal Status section.

You can set the local clock to SNTP only if the following two conditions are met:

•The SNTP server is configured.

•The SNTP last attempt status is successful.

8. In the Time Zone Name field, specify a time zone.

In the Offset Hours and Offset Minutes fields, you can also specify the number of hours

and number of minutes that the time zone is different from the Coordinated Universal

Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the display of the current system time. The default

value is UTC.

Note: When you use an SNTP or NTP time server, the time data that is

received from the server is based on the UTC, which is the same as

Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time zone in

which the switch is located.

9. In the Offset Hours field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different from

UTC.

The allowed range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

10. In the Offset Minutes field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is different

from UTC.

The allowed range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.

11. Next to Client Mode, select the mode of operation of the SNTP client:

•Unicast. SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request

to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can

determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative

to the server.

• Broadcast. SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local

broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address provides a

single-subnet scope while a multicast address provides an Internet-wide scope.

The default value is Unicast.

12. If the SNTP client mode is Unicast, use the SNTP Server Configuration page to add the IP

address or DNS name of one or more SNTP servers for the switch to poll.

For more information, see Configure an SNTP server on page 76.

13. In the Port field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.

The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and 123. The default value is 123. When the default

value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is assigned by the

operating system.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual74

14. In the Unicast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between unicast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2. to The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.

15. In the Broadcast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between broadcast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2.

Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded. The allowed range is

6 to 10. The default value is 6.

16. In the Unicast Poll Timeout field, specify the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP

response to a unicast poll request.

The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

17. In the Unicast Poll Retry field, specify the number of times to retry a unicast poll request to

an SNTP server after the first time-out before the switch attempts to use the next configured

server.

The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.

18. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the SNTP global status

When you select the SNTP option as the clock source, you can view the SNTP global status.

To view SNTP global status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual75

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

When you select the SNTP option as the clock source, the SNTP Global Status is

displayed below the SNTP Global Configuration section.

7. Click the Refresh button to refresh the page with the latest information about the switch.

The following table displays the nonconfigurable SNTP Global Status information.

Table 13. SNTP Global Status information

Field Description

Version The SNTP version that the client supports.

Supported mode The SNTP modes that the client supports. Multiple modes can be supported by

a client.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP client last updated the system

clock.

Last Attempt Time The local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt of an

unsolicited message.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast

and broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of

Other is displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes.

• Other. The status of the last request is unknown.

• Success. The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was

updated.

• Request Timed Out. After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server,

the response timer expired before a response from the server was

received.

• Bad Date Encoded. The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version Not Supported. The SNTP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized. The SNTP server is not synchronized with its

peers. This is indicated by the leap indicator field in the SNTP message.

• Server Kiss Of Death. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries

were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to

0 in a message received from a server.

Server IP Address The IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no message

was received from any server, an empty string is shown.

Address Type The address type of the SNTP server address for the last received valid

packet.

Server Stratum The claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual76

Configure an SNTP server

SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.

Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. The switch operates only as

an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.

Time sources are established by strata. Strata define the accuracy of the reference clock. The

higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The device

receives time from Stratum 1 and above since it is itself a Stratum 2 device.

The following is an example of strata:

• Stratum 0. A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.

• Stratum 1. A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1

time servers provide primary network time standards.

• Stratum 2. The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.

For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, through NTP, from

a Stratum 1 server.

Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server

type.

SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:

•T1. Time that the original request was sent by the client.

•T2. Time that the original request was received by the server.

•T

3. Time that the server sent a reply.

•T

4. Time that the client received the server's reply.

The device can poll unicast server types for the server time.

Polling for unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.

SNTP servers that were configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for

synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the

preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this

method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the

device using the SNTP Server Configuration page.

Reference Clock ID The reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet.

Server mode The mode of the server for the last received valid packet.

Unicast Server Max Entries The maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured on this

client.

Unicast Server Current Entries The number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client.

Broadcast Count The number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that were received and

processed by the SNTP client since the last reboot.

Table 13. SNTP Global Status information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual77

The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or

at every poll interval.

You can view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time Protocol

SNTP servers.

Add an SNTP server

To add an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual78

7. From the Server Type menu, select the type of SNTP address to enter in the address field.

The address can be either an IPv4 address or host name (DNS). The default value is

IPv4.

8. In the Address field, specify the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.

This is a text string of up to 64 characters, containing the encoded unicast IP address or

host name of an SNTP server. Unicast SNTP requests are sent to this address. If this

address is a DNS host name, then that host name is resolved into an IP address each

time an SNTP request is sent to it.

9. If the UDP port on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent is not the standard

port (123), specify the port number in the Port field.

The valid range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 123.

10. In Priority field, specify the priority order which to the switch must query the servers.

The SNTP client on the device continues sending SNTP requests to different servers until

a successful response is received, or all servers are exhausted. The priority indicates the

order in which to the switch must query the servers. The request is sent to an SNTP

server with a priority value of 1 first, then to a server with a priority value of 2, and so on.

If any servers are assigned the same priority, the SNTP client contacts the servers in the

order that they appear in the table. The valid range is 1 to 3. The default value is 1.

11. Click the Add button.

The SNTP server entry is added.

12. Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers.

You can configure up to three SNTP servers.

The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers

configured on your switch. The following table describes the SNTP Server Global Status

information.

Table 14. SNTP Server Status information

Field Description

Address All the existing server addresses. If no server configuration exists, a message stating

that no SNTP server exists displays on the page.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the response from this server was used to update

the system clock.

Last Attempt Time The local date and time (UTC) that this SNTP server was last queried.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual79

Change the settings for an existing SNTP server

To change the settings for an existing SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and

broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of Other is

displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes:

• Other. The status of the last request is unknown, or no SNTP responses were

received.

• Success. The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

• Request Timed Out. After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server, the

response timer expired before a response from the server was received.

• Bad Date Encoded. The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version Not Supported. The SNTP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized. The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This

is indicated by the leap indicator field on the SNTP message.

Requests The number of SNTP requests made to this server since last agent reboot.

Failed Requests The number of failed SNTP requests made to this server since the last reboot.

Table 14. SNTP Server Status information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual80

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the configured server.

8. Specify new values in the available fields.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove an SNTP server

To remove an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the configured server to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The entry is removed, and the device is updated.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual81

Configure daylight saving time settings

You can configure settings for summer time, which is also known as daylight saving time.

Used in some countries around the world, summer time is the practice of temporarily

advancing clocks during the summer months. Typically clocks are adjusted forward one or

more hours near the start of spring and are adjusted backward in autumn.

To configure the daylight saving time settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > Daylight Saving Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual82

7. Select a Daylight Saving (DST) radio button:

• Disable. Disable daylight saving time.

• Recurring. Daylight saving time occurs at the same time every year. The start and

end times and dates for the time shift must be manually configured.

• Recurring EU. The system clock uses the standard recurring summer time settings

used in countries in the European Union. When this option is selected, the rest of the

applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.

• Recurring USA. The system clock uses the standard recurring daylight saving time

settings used in the United States. When this option is selected, the rest of the

applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.

• Non Recurring. Daylight saving time settings are in effect only between the start date

and end date of the specified year. When this option is selected, the summer time

settings do not repeat on an annual basis.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The fields in the following tables are visible only when the DayLight Saving (DST) Recurring,

Recurring EU, or Recurring USA radio button is selected.

Table 15. Daylight saving setting is Recurring, Recurring EU, or Recurring USA

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Week. Configure the start week.

• Day. Configure the start day.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Hours. Configure the start hours.

• Minutes. Configure the start minutes.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual83

The fields in the following table are visible only when the DayLight Saving (DST) Non

Recurring radio button is selected.

Table 16. Daylight saving setting is Non Recurring

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

Offset Specify the number of minutes to shift the summer time from the standard

time. The valid range is 1–1440 minutes.

Zone Specify the acronym associated with the time zone when summer time is in

effect. This field is not validated against an official list of time zone

acronyms.

View the daylight saving time status

The Daylight Saving (DST) Status section shows information about the summer time settings

and whether the time shift for summer time is currently in effect.

To view the daylight saving time status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Week. Configure the end week.

• Day. Configure the end day.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Hours. Configure the end hours.

• Minutes. Configure the end minutes.

Offset Configure recurring offset in minutes. The valid range is 1–1440 minutes.

Zone Configure the time zone.

• Week. Configure the start week.

• Day. Configure the start day.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Hours. Configure the start hours.

• Minutes. Configure the start minutes.

• Week. Configure the end week.

• Day. Configure the end day.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Hours. Configure the end hours.

• Minutes. Configure the end minutes.

Table 15. Daylight saving setting is Recurring, Recurring EU, or Recurring USA (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual84

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration.

7. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual85

The following table displays the nonconfigurable daylight saving status information.

Table 17. Daylight Saving (DST) Status information

Field Description

Daylight Saving (DST) The Daylight Saving value, which is one of the following:

Begins At The start date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when

daylight saving time is disabled.

Ends At The end date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when

daylight saving time is disabled.

Offset (in Minutes) The offset value in minutes.This field is not displayed when daylight saving

time is disabled.

Zone The zone acronym. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is

disabled.

Daylight Saving (DST) in Effect Indicates whether daylight saving time is in effect.

Configure denial of service settings

You can configure the Denial of Service (DoS) settings for the switch. The switch provides

support for classifying and blocking specific types of DoS attacks.

Configure Auto-DoS

You can automatically enable all the DoS features available on the switch, except for the L4

Port attack. For information about the types of DoS attacks the switch can monitor and block,

see Configure denial of service on page 86.

To enable the Auto-DoS feature:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

• Disable

• Recurring

• Recurring EU

• Recurring USA

• Non Recurring

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual86

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Denial of Service > Auto-DoS Configuration.

The Auto-DoS Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Auto-DoS Mode Enable radio button.

When an attack is detected, a warning message is logged to the buffered log and is sent

to the syslog server. At the same time, the port is shut down and can be enabled only

manually by the admin user.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure denial of service

You can select which types of denial of service (DoS) attacks the switch monitors and blocks.

To configure individual DoS settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual87

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Denial of Service > Denial of Service Configuration.

7. Select the types of DoS attacks for the switch to monitor and block and configure any

associated values:

• Denial of Service Min TCP Header Size. Specify the minimum allowed TCP header

size. If you select the Denial of Service TCP Fragment Enable radio button, the

switch first drops packets for which the first TCP fragments include the following TCP

payload: IP_Payload_Length - IP_Header_Size <

Min_TCP_Header_Size. Enter a value in the range from 0 to 31. The default value

is 20.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual88

• Denial of Service Max ICMP Packet Size. Specify the maximum allowed ICMP

packet size. If you select the Denial of Service ICMPv4 Enable radio button or the

Denial of Service ICMPv6 Enable radio button, the switch drops ICMP or ICMPv6

ping packets that exceed the size that you specify. Enter a value in the range from 0 to

16376. The default value is 512.

• Denial of Service ICMPv4. Enabling ICMPv4 DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop ICMPv4 packets with a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size that exceeds

the specified maximum allowed ICMP packet size. By default, this option is disabled.

• Denial of Service ICMPv6. Enabling ICMPv6 DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop ICMPv6 packets with a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size that exceeds

the specified maximum allowed ICMPv6 packet size. By default, this option is

disabled.

• Denial of Service Ping of death. Enabling Ping of Death DoS prevention causes the

switch to drop ICMP ping packet larger than 65535 bytes. By default, this option is

disabled.

• Denial of Service IPv6 Fragment. Enabling IPv6 Fragment DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop IPv6 packets for which the header is fragmented, the More flag is

set to 1, and the payload length is smaller than 1240. By default, this option is

disabled.

• Denial of Service ICMP Fragment. Enabling ICMP Fragment DoS prevention

causes the switch to drop fragmented ICMP packets. By default, this option is

disabled.

• Denial of Service Smurf. Enabling Smurf DoS prevention causes the switch to drop

broadcast ICMP echo request packets. By default, this option is disabled.

• Denial of Service SIP=DIP. Enabling SIP=DIP DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop packets with a source IP address that is equal to the destination IP address. By

default, this option is disabled.

• Denial of Service SMAC=DMAC. Enabling SMAC=DMAC DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with a source MAC address that is equal to the destination

MAC address. By default, this option is disabled.

• Denial of Service TCP FIN&URG&PSH. Enabling TCP FIN & URG & PSH DoS

prevention causes the switch to drop packets for which the TCP FIN, URG, and PSH

flags are set to 1 and for which the TCP sequence number is set to 0. By default, this

option is disabled.

• Denial of Service TCP Flag&Sequence. Enabling TCP Flag DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets for which the TCP control flags are set to 0 and the TCP

sequence number is set to 0. By default, this option is disabled.

• Denial of Service TCP Fragment. Enabling TCP Fragment DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with a TCP payload for which the IP payload length minus

the IP header size is smaller than the minimum allowed TCP header size. By default,

this option is disabled.

• Denial of Service TCP Offset. Enabling TCP Offset DoS prevention causes the

switch to drop packets with a TCP header offset of 1. By default, this option is

disabled.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual89

• Denial of Service TCP Port. Enabling TCP Port DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop packets with a TCP source port that is equal to the TCP destination port. By

default, this option is disabled.

• Denial of Service TCP SYN&FIN. Enabling TCP SYN & FIN DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets for which the TCP flags SYN and FIN are set to 1. By

default, this option is disabled.

• Denial of Service TCP SYN&RST. Enabling TCP SYN & RST DoS prevention

causes the switch to drop packets for which the TCP flags SYN and RST are set to 1.

By default, this option is disabled.

• Denial of Service UDP Port. Enabling UDP Port DoS prevention causes the switch

to drop packets with a UDP source port that is equal to the UDP destination port. By

default, this option is disabled.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure DNS settings

You can configure information about DNS servers that the network uses and how the switch

operates as a DNS client.

Configure the global DNS settings and add a DNS server

You can configure the global DNS settings and DNS server information.

To configure the global DNS settings and add a DNS server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual90

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration.

7. Select the Disable or Enable radio button to specify whether to disable or enable the

administrative status of the DNS client.

• Enable. Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS

domain name. The DNS is enabled by default.

• Disable. Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries.

8. In the DNS Default Name field, enter the default DNS domain name to include in DNS

queries.

When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified host name, this field is

provides the domain name (for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the

user enters test, then test is changed to test.netgear.com to resolve the name). The name

must not be longer than 255 characters.

9. In the DNS Server field, specify the IPv4 address to which the switch sends DNS queries.

10. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the list. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The Preference

field displays the server preference order. The preference is set in the order in which

preferences were entered.

11. To remove a DNS server from the list, select its check box and click the Delete button.

If you click the Delete button without selecting a DNS server, all the DNS servers are

deleted.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual91

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

13. To refresh the page, click the Refresh button.

The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information.

Table 18. DNS Server Configuration information

Field Description

ID The identification of the DNS Server.

Preference Shows the preference of the DNS server. The preferences are

determined by the order in which they were entered.

Remove a DNS server

You can remove a DNS server that you no longer need.

To remove a DNS server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual92

7. In the DNS Server Configuration table, select the check box for the DNS server.

Note: If you do not select a DNS server, all the DNS servers are removed

after you click the Delete button.

8. Click the Delete button.

The DNS server is removed.

Configure and view host name-to-IP address information

You can manually map host names to IP addresses or view dynamic host mappings.

Add a static entry to the dynamic host mapping table

To add a static entry to the local dynamic host mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual93

7. In the Host Name (1 to 255 characters) field, specify the static host name to add.

Its length cannot exceed 255 characters and it is a required field.

8. In the IPv4/IPv6 Address field, enter the IP address to associate with the host name.

9. Click the Add button.

The entry displays in the list on the page.

Remove an entry from the dynamic host mapping table

To remove an entry from the dynamic host mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual94

6. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the entry to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

Change the host name or IP address in an entry of the dynamic host mapping

table, view all entries, or clear all entries

To change the host name or IP address in an entry of the dynamic host mapping table,

view all entries, or clear all entries:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page display.

7. Select the check box next to the entry to update.

8. Enter the new information in the appropriate field.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual95

10. To clear all the dynamic host name entries from the list, click the Clear button.

The dynamic host mapping table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch

learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields.

Table 19. Dynamic Host Mapping information

Field Description

Host Lists the host name that you assign to the specified IP address.

Total Time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table.

Elapsed Time since the dynamic entry was last updated.

Type The type of the dynamic entry.

Addresses Lists the IP address associated with the host name.

Configure green Ethernet settings

You can configure the green Ethernet features to reduce power consumption.

Configure the global green Ethernet settings

You can configure the global green Ethernet settings.

To configure the global green Ethernet settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual96

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Configuration.

7. Select the Auto Power Down Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

By default, this mode is disabled. When a port link is down, the underlying physical layer

goes down for a short period and then checks for port link pulses again so that

auto-negotiation remains possible. In this way, the switch saves power when no link

partner is present for the port.

8. Select the EEE Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

By default, this mode is disabled. Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC with

a family of physical layers that support operation in a low power mode. It is defined by the

IEEE 802.3az standard. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive sides of

the link to disable some functionality for power savings when lightly loaded. Transition to

low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not dropped or

corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is transparent to

upper layer protocols and applications.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure green Ethernet interface settings

You can configure green Ethernet settings for individual interfaces.

To configure the green Ethernet interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual97

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Interface

Configuration.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the EEE mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Disable. If the EEE mode is not supported, then N/A is displayed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual98

Use the Device View

For information about the device view, see Use the Device View of the local browser UI on

page 44.

Configure Power over Ethernet

You can configure the global Power over Ethernet (PoE) configuration settings and the PoE

settings for each port.

PoE concepts

The following table shows the PoE+ capacity for each model.

Table 20. PoE capacities

Model Maximum Power Budget

Across All Active PoE+ Ports

Maximum PoE Power

Per Individual Port

GS728TPv2 190W

30W PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at)

GS728TPPv2 380W

GS752TPv2. 380W

GS752TPP 760W

By default, supplied power is prioritized in ascending port order, up to the total power budget

of the device. If the power requirements for the attached devices exceed the total power

budget of the switch, the power to the device on the highest-numbered PoE+ port is disabled

to make sure that the devices connected to the higher-priority, lower-numbered PoE+ ports

are supported first.

It is important to note that although a device is listed as an 802.3at (PoE+) powered or

802.3af (PoE) powered device, it might not require the maximum power limit that is specified.

Many devices require less power, allowing all PoE+ ports to be active simultaneously, when

the devices correctly report their PoE class to the switch.

Device class power requirements

PoE and PoE+ use Ethernet cables to supply power to PoE-capable devices on the network,

such as WiFi access points, IP cameras, VoIP phones, and switches. The switch is compliant

with the IEEE 802.3at standard (PoE+) and backward compatible with the IEEE 802.3af

standard (PoE). The switch can pass power through to any powered device (PD) that

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual99

supports these standards. PoE and PoE+ let you power such devices without the need for a

separate power supply.

The switch supports a Plug-and-Play process by which it detects the type of device that is

connected to one of its PoE+ ports and whether that device needs power and how much so

that the switch can provide the correct power to the device.

During the Plug-and-Play process, the connected device can provide its Class response to

the switch in many ways, depending on how the vendor programmed the device.

The following table shows the device classes for PoE+ devices adhering to the IEEE 802.3at

standard. The device classes for PoE devices adhering to the IEEE 802.3af standard are

identical with the exception that Device Class 4 is not supported.

Table 21. PoE and PoE+ device class power allocation

Device

Class

Standard Range of Power Deliv-

ered to the Powered

Device

Minimum Output at

PoE Switch Port (Mini-

mum Allocated)

Maximum Output at

PoE Switch Port (Maxi-

mum Allocated)

0 PoE and PoE+ 0.44W–12.95W 15.4W 16.2W

1 PoE and PoE+ 0.44W–3.84W 4.0W 4.2W

2 PoE and PoE+ 3.84W–6.49W 7.0W 7.4W

3 PoE and PoE+ 6.49W–12.95W 15.4W 16.2W

4 PoE+ only 12.95W–25.5W 30.0W 31.6W

Power allocation and power budget concepts

The switch is a smart switch in that it can allocate the required power to a connected device

by using a prioritization scheme: By default, power is supplied in ascending port order (that

is, lower port numbers are served first) until the power budget is consumed and insufficient

power remains to allocate to the next device. When less than 7W of PoE power is available

on a port, the port PoE LED lights yellow, and the attached device does not receive power

from the port. However, the switch continues to send data through the port connection.

The switch is also a smart switch in that it can override the IEEE power classification of a

powered device (PD): If the PD consumes less power than required by its power

classification, the switch provides only the power that the PD consumes instead of the power

that is required by the PD’s power classification.

If some PoE+ ports are in use and deliver power, you can calculate the available power

budget for the other PoE+ ports by subtracting the consumed (that is, delivered power) from

the total available power budget. (For information about the total available power budget, see

PoE concepts on page 98.)

An example for model GS728TPv2:

Port 1 delivers 4.4W to a PD. The available power budget is 185.6W (190W–4.4W).

An example for model GS752TPP:

A Class 4 PD is attached to Port 1, a Class 2 PD to Port 2, and another Class 4 PD to Port 3.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual100

However, the PDs consume less power than defined by their classes: The PD attached to

Port 1 consumes 7.3W, the PD attached to Port 2 consumes 4.7W, and the PD attached to

Port 3 consumes 8.9W. So even though the switch provides power to two Class 4 devices

and one Class 3 device, if the default power adapter is installed, the available power budget

is 739.1W (760W–7.3–4.7–8.9W).

To determine the delivered power by a PoE+ port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration.

The delivered power is stated in the Output Power (mW) column.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual101

Configure the global PoE settings

To configure the global PoE settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > PoE > Basic > PoE Configuration.

7. In the System Usage Threshold field, enter a number from 1 to 99 to set the threshold

level at which a trap is sent if the consumed power exceeds the threshold power.

8. From the Power Management mode menu, select the power management algorithm that

the switch uses to deliver power to the requesting powered devices (PDs):

• Static. Specifies that the power allocated for each port depends on the type of power

threshold configured on the port.

• Dynamic. Specifies that the power consumption on each port is measured and

calculated in real time.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual102

9. To active the PoE traps, from the Traps menu, select Enable.

Selecting Disable deactivates the PoE traps. The default setting is Enabled.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 22. PoE Configuration fields

Field Description

Firmware Version The firmware version of the PoE firmware component.

Power Status The power status.

Total Power Available Watts The maximum amount of power in watts that the switch can deliver to all ports.

Threshold Power Watts If the consumed power is below the threshold power, the switch can power up

another port. The consumed power can be between the nominal and threshold

power. The threshold power is displayed in watts.

Consumed Power Watts The total amount of power in watts that is being delivered to all ports.

Configure the PoE port settings

To configure the PoE port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

Note: The threshold power value is determined by the value that you enter in the

System Usage Threshold field.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual103

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Port Power menu, select the administrative PoE mode of the port:

• Enable. The port’s capacity to deliver power is enabled. This is the default setting.

• Disable. The port’s capacity to deliver power is disabled.

9. From the Port Priority menu, select the priority for the port in relation to other ports if the

total power that the switch is capable of delivering exceeds the total power budget:

• Low. Low priority. This is the default setting.

•Medium. Medium priority.

• High. High priority.

• Critical. Critical priority.

The port priority determines which ports can still deliver power after the total power

delivered by the switch exceeds the total power budget. (In such a situation, the switch

might not be able to deliver power to all connected devices.) If the same priority applies to

two ports, the lower-numbered port receives higher priority.

10. From the Power Mode menu, select the PoE mode that the port must function in:

• 802.3af. The port is powered in and limited to the IEEE 802.3af mode. A PD that

requires IEEE 802.3at does not receive power if the port functions in IEEE 802.3af

mode.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual104

• Legacy. The port is powered using high-inrush current, which is used by legacy PDs

that require more than 15W to power up.

• Pre-802.3at. The port is initially powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode and, before

75 msec pass, is switched to the high power IEEE 802.3at mode. Select this mode if

the PD does not perform Layer 2 classification or if the switch performs

2-event Layer 1 classification.

• 802.3at. The port is powered in the IEEE 802.3at mode and is backward compatible

with IEEE 802.3af. The 802.3at mode is the default mode. In this mode, if the switch

detects that the attached PD requests more power than IEEE 802.3af but is not an

IEEE 802.3at Class 4 device, the PD does not receive power from the switch.

11. From the Power Limit Type menu, select how the port controls the maximum power that it

can deliver:

• None. The port draws up to Class 0 maximum power in low power mode and up to

Class 4 maximum power in high power mode.

•Class. The port power limit is equal to the class of the attached PD.

•User. The port power limit is equal to the value that is specified in the Power Limit

(mW) field. This is the default setting.

Note: If a PD does not report its class correctly, use of these options can

preserve additional PoE power by preventing the switch from

delivering more power than the PD requires. However, depending on

which option you select, a PD that does not report its class correctly

might not power up at all.

12. In the Power Limit (mW) field, enter the maximum power (in mW) that the port can deliver.

The range is 3,000–30,000 mW. The default is 30,000 mW.

13. From the Detection Type menu, select how the port detects the attached PD:

• IEEE 802. The port performs a 4-point resistive detection. This is the default setting.

• 4pt 802.3af + Legacy. The port performs a 4-point resistive detection, and if required,

continues with legacy detection.

• Legacy. The port performs legacy detection.

14. From the Timer Schedule menu, select a timer schedule or select None, which is the

default selection.

For information about setting up and configuring PoE timer schedules, see Set up PoE

timer schedules on page 151.

15. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual105

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 23. PoE Port Configuration

Field Description

High Power All ports supports high power mode.

Max Power (mW) The maximum power in milliwatts that can be provided by the port.

Class The class defines the range of power that a powered device (PD) is drawing from

the switch. The class definitions are as follows:

Output Voltage (Volts) The voltage that is delivered to the PD in volts.

Output Current (mA) The current that is delivered to the PD in mA.

Output Power (W) The power that is delivered to the PD in watts.

Status The operational status of the port. The possible values are as follows:

Fault Status The error description when the PoE port is in a fault state. The possible values are

as follows:

• 0: 0.44–16.2W

• 1: 0.44–4.2W

• 2: 0.44–7.4W

• 3: 0.44–16.2W

• 4: 0.44–31.6W

• Unknown. The class cannot be detected, or no PD is attached to the port.

• Disabled. No power is delivered.

• Delivering Power. Power is being drawn by the PD.

• Requesting Power. The port is requesting power.

• Fault. A problem occurred with the power.

• Searching. The port is not in one of the other states in this list.

• No Error. The port is not in any error state and can provide power.

• MPS Absent. The port detected the absence of the main power supply,

preventing the port from providing power.

• Short. The port detected a short circuit condition, preventing the port from

providing power.

• Overload. The PD that is connected to the port attempts to draw more power

than allowed by the port’s settings, preventing the port from providing power at

all.

• Power Denied. The port was denied power because of a shortage of power or

because of an administrative condition. In this condition, the port does not

provide power.

• Startup Failure. The PD that is connected to the port failed to start up. In this

condition, the port does not provide power.

• Over Voltage. The port was denied power because of a over-voltage lockout.

• Under Voltage. The port was denied power because of an under-voltage

lockout.

• Thermal Shutdown. The port detected a thermal temperature fault, preventing

the port from providing power.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual106

Configure SNMP

You can configure SNMP settings for SNMPv1/v2 and SNMPv3. The switch software

supports the configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage traps that the SNMP

agent generates.

The switch uses both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs that

support additional switch functionality. All private MIBs begin with a hyphen (-) prefix. The

main object for interface configuration is in -SWITCHING-MIB, which is a private MIB. Some

interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB, IF-MIB.

Configure the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 community

Only the communities that you define can access to the switch using the SNMP V1 and

SNMP V2 protocols. Only those communities with read/write level access can be used to

change the configuration using SNMP.

Add an SNMP community:

To add an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual107

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

7. In the Management Station IP field, specify the IP address of the management station.

8. In the Management Station IP Mask field, specify the subnet mask to associate with the

management station IP address.

Together, the management station IP and the management station IP mask denote a

range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to access this

device. If either the management station IP or management station IP mask value is

0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, every client’s address is

ANDed with the mask, as is the management station IP address. If the values are equal,

access is allowed. For example, if the management station IP and management station

IP mask settings are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, then any client whose address is

192.168.1.0 through 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To allow access from

only one station, use a management station IP mask value of 255.255.255.255, and use

that machine’s IP address for client address.

9. In the Community String field, specify a community name.

10. From the Access Mode menu, select the access level for this community, which is either

Read/Write or Read Only.

11. From the Status menu, select to enable or disable the community.

If you select Enable, the community name must be unique among all valid community

names or the set requests are rejected. If you select Disable, the community name

becomes invalid.

12. Click the Add button.

The selected community is added.

Modify an existing SNMP community

To modify an existing SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual108

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the community.

8. Update the desired fields.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an SNMP community

To delete an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual109

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the community to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The community is removed.

Configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap settings

You can configure settings for each SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 management host that must

receive notifications about traps generated by the device. The SNMP management host is

also known as the SNMP trap receiver.

Add an SNMP trap receiver

To add an SNMP trap receiver:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual110

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

7. In the Recipients IP field, enter the IPv4 address in the x.x.x.x format to receive SNMP traps

from this device.

8. From the Version menu, select the trap version to be used by the SNMP trap receiver:

• SNMP V1. The switch uses SNMPv1 to send traps to the receiver. The default setting

is SNMP V1.

• SNMP V2. The switch uses SNMPv2 to send traps to the receiver.

9. In the Community String field, specify the name of the SNMP community that includes

the SNMP management host and the SNMP agent on the device.

This name can be up to 16 characters and is case-sensitive.

10. From the Status menu, select Enable to send traps to the receiver or select Disable to

prevent the switch from sending traps to the receiver.

11. Click the Add button.

The receiver configuration is added.

Modify information about an existing SNMP trap recipient

To modify information about an existing SNMP trap recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual111

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the recipient.

8. Update the desired fields.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an SNMP trap recipient

To delete an SNMP trap recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual112

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the recipient to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The trap recipient is removed.

Configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap flags

You can enable or disable traps that the switch can send to an SNMP manager. When the

condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch, a trap message is sent to

any enabled SNMP trap receivers, and a message is written to the trap log.

To configure the trap flags:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual113

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Flags.

7. Enable or disable the following system traps:

• Authentication. When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when events involving

authentication occur, such as when a user attempts to access the device

management interface and fails to provide a valid user name and password. The

default is Enable.

• Link Up/Down. When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when the administrative or

operational state of a physical or logical link changes. The default is Enable.

•Spanning Tree. When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when various spanning tree

events occur. The default is Enable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the supported MIBs

This page displays a list of all MIBs supported by the switch.

To view the supported MIBs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual114

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Supported MIBs.

The following table describes the SNMP Supported MIBs Status fields.

Table 24. SNMP supported MIBs

Field Description

Name The RFC number if applicable and the name of the MIB.

Description The RFC title or MIB description.

Configure SNMPv3 users

Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMPv3 protocol, but for authentication and

encryption, the switch supports only one user (admin). Therefore, you can create or modify

only one profile.

To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMPv3 admin profile by

using the web interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual115

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv3 > User Configuration.

The User Configuration page displays.

The SNMPv3 Access Mode field is a read-only field that shows the access privileges for

the user account. Access for the admin account is always Read/Write. Access for all

other accounts is Read Only.

7. To enable authentication, select an Authentication Protocol radio button.

You can select the MD5 radio button or the SHA radio button. With either of these

options, the user login password is used as SNMPv3 authentication password. For

information about how to configure the login password, see Change the local device

password for the local browser UI on page 346.

8. To enable encryption:

a. Select the Encryption Protocol DES radio button to encrypt SNMPv3 packets using

the DES encryption protocol.

b. In the Encryption Key field, enter an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric

characters.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual116

Configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol

The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations

on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. This information is

viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on

the LAN.

LLDP is a one-way protocol without any request/response sequences. Information is

advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by

stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be

enabled or disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on

all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine

appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an

enhancement to LLDP with the following features:

•Autodiscovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 priority, and DiffServ settings),

enabling plug and play networking.

•Device location discovery for creation of location databases.

•Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.

•Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices

and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions,

serial/asset number).

Configure LLDP global settings

You can specify the global LLDP and LLDP-MED settings that are applied to the switch.

To configure global LLDP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual117

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > LLDP > Basic > LLDP Configuration.

7. To configure nondefault values for the following LLDP properties, specify the following

options:

• TLV Advertised Interval. The number of seconds between transmissions of LLDP

advertisements.

• Hold Multiplier. The transmit interval multiplier value, where transmit hold multiplier ×

transmit interval = the time to live (TTL) value that the device advertises to neighbors.

• Re-initializing Delay. The number of seconds to wait before attempting to re-initialize

LLDP on a port after the LLDP operating mode on the port changes.

• Transmit Delay. The minimum number of seconds to wait between transmissions of

remote data change notifications to one or more SNMP trap receivers configured on

the switch.

8. To configure a nondefault value for LLDP-MED, enter a value in the Fast Start Duration

field.

This value sets the number of LLDP packets sent when the LLDP-MED fast start

mechanism is initialized, which occurs when a new endpoint device links with the

LLDP-MED network connectivity device.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual118

Configure LLDP port settings

You can specify LLDP settings for a port.

To configure LLDP settings for a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP Port Settings.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual119

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. Use the following menus to configure the LLDP settings for the selected ports:

•Admin Status. Select the status for transmitting and receiving LLDP packets:

- Tx Only. Enable only transmitting LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

- Rx Only. Enable only receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

- Tx and Rx. Enable both transmitting and receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected

ports.

- Disabled. Do not transmit or receive LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

The default is Tx and Rx.

• Management IP Address. Choose whether to advertise the management IP address

from the interface. The possible field values are as follows:

-Stop Advertise. Do not advertise the management IP address from the interface.

- Auto Advertise. Advertise the current IP address of the device as the

management IP address.

The default is Auto Advertise.

• Notification. When notifications are enabled, LLDP interacts with the trap manager to

notify subscribers of remote data change statistics. The default is Disable.

• Optional TLV(s). Enable or disable the transmission of optional type-length value

(TLV) information from the interface. The default is Enable. The TLV information

includes the system name, system description, system capabilities, and port

description.

For information about how to configure the system name, see View or define system

information on page 55. For information about how to configure the port description,

see Configure the port settings and maximum frame size on page 160.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual120

View the LLDP-MED network policy

You can display information about the LLPD-MED network policy TLV transmitted in the

LLDP frames on the selected local interface.

To view the LLDP-MED network policy information for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Network Policy.

The LLDP-MED Network Policy page displays.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want to view the information.

Note: The menu includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled. If no

interfaces are enabled for LLDP, the Interface menu does not display.

The page refreshes and displays the data transmitted in the network policy TLVs for the

interface.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual121

The following table describes the LLDP-MED network policy information that displays on the

page.

Table 25. LLDP-MED network policy information

Field Description

Network Policy Number The policy number.

Application The media application type associated with the policy, which can be one of the

following:

A port can receive multiple application types. The application information is

displayed only if a network policy TLV was transmitted from the port.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Indicates whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Configure the LLDP-MED port settings

You can enable LLDP-MED mode on a port and configure its properties.

To configure LLDP-MED settings for a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

• Unknown

• Voice

• Guest Voice

• Guest Voice Signaling

• Softphone Voice

• Video Conferencing

• Streaming Video

• Video Signaling

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual122

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Port Settings.

The LLDP-MED Port Settings page displays.

7. From the Port menu, select the port to configure.

8. Use the following menus to enable or disable the following LLDP-MED settings for the

selected port:

• LLDP-MED Status. The administrative status of LLDP-MED on the interface. When

LLDP-MED is enabled, the transmit and receive function of LLDP is effectively

enabled on the interface.

• Notification. When Notification is enabled, the port sends a topology change

notification if a device is connected or removed.

• MED Capabilities. When MED Capabilities is enabled, the port transmits the

capabilities type length values (TLVs) in the LLDP PDU frames.

•Network Policy. When Network Policy is enabled, the port transmits the network

policy TLV in LLDP frames.

• Extended MDI-PSE. When Extended MDI-PSE is enabled, the port transmits the

extended PSE TLV in LLDP frames.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the local information advertised through LLDP

You can view the data that each port advertises through LLDP.

To view the local LLDP information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual123

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Advanced > LLDP > Local Information.

The following table describes the LLDP device information and port summary information.

Field Description

Chassis ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the switch in the Chassis ID field.

Chassis ID The hardware platform identifier for the switch.

System Name The user-configured system name for the switch.

System Description The switch description, which includes information about the product model

and platform.

System Capabilities The primary functions that the switch supports.

Interface The interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.

Port ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the interface in the Port ID field.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual124

7. To view additional details about a port, click the name of the port in the Interface column of

the Port Information table.

The following table describes the detailed local information that displays for the selected

port.

Port ID The port number.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port. For information about how to

configure the port description, see Configure the port settings and

maximum frame size on page 160.

Advertisement The TLV advertisement status of the port.

Field Description

Managed Address

Address SubType The type of address that the management interface (which includes the local

browser UI) uses, such as an IPv4 address.

Address The address used to manage the device.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The number that identifies the port.

MAC/PHY Details

Auto Negotiation Supported Indicates whether the interface supports port speed autonegotiation. The

possible values are True and False.

Auto Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The possible values are True

(enabled) or False (disabled).

Auto Negotiation Advertised

Capabilities

The port speed autonegotiation capabilities such as 1000BASE-T half-duplex

mode or 100BASE-TX full-duplex mode.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The MED capabilities enabled on the port.

Current Capabilities The TLVs advertised by the port.

Device Class Network Connectivity indicates that the device is a network connectivity

device.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual125

View the LLDP neighbors information

You can view the data that a specific port received from other LLDP-enabled systems.

To view the LLDP information received from a neighbor device:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Advanced > LLDP > Neighbor Information.

VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual126

If no information was received from a neighbor device, or if the link partner is not

LLDP-enabled, no information displays.

The following table describes the information that displays for all LLDP neighbors that

were discovered.

Field Description

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote

device.

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device. If the field is blank, the

name might not be configured on the remote system.

7. To view additional information about the remote device, click the link in the MSAP Entry

column.

A pop-up window displays information for the selected port.

The following table describes the information transmitted by the neighbor.

Field Description

Port Details

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote device.

Basic Details

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual127

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device.

System Description The description of the selected port associated with the remote system.

System Capabilities The system capabilities of the remote system.

Managed Addresses

Address SubType The type of the management address.

Address The advertised management address of the remote system.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The port on the remote device that sent the information.

MAC/PHY Details

Auto-Negotiation Supported Specifies whether the remote device supports port-speed autonegotiation.

The possible values are True or False.

Auto-Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The possible values are True

and False.

Auto Negotiation Advertised

Capabilities

The port speed autonegotiation capabilities.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The supported capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Current Capabilities The advertised capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Device Class The LLDP-MED endpoint device class. The possible device classes are as

follows:

• Endpoint Class 1 Indicates a generic endpoint class, offering basic LLDP

services.

• Endpoint Class 2 Indicates a media endpoint class, offering media

streaming capabilities as well as all Class 1 features.

• Endpoint Class 3 Indicates a communications device class, offering all

Class 1 and Class 2 features plus location, 911, Layer 2 switch support,

and device information management capabilities.

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual128

Configure a DHCP L2 relay

If you enable and configure a DHCP relay agent on the switch, some Layer 2 (L2) devices do

not need to connect to a DHCP server on the physical network. A relay agent automatically

populates the gateway IP address (giaddr) field and adds the Relay Agent Information option

to DHCP messages. A DHCP server uses this option for IP addresses and other assignment

policies. A DHCP relay agent is usually an IP routing-aware device, which is also referred to

Hardware Revision The hardware version advertised by the remote device.

Firmware Revision The firmware version advertised by the remote device.

Software Revision The software version advertised by the remote device.

Serial Number The serial number advertised by the remote device.

Model Name The model name advertised by the remote device.

Asset ID The asset ID advertised by the remote device.

Location Information

Civic The physical location, such as the street address, that the remote device

advertised in the location TLV, for example, 123 45th St. E. The field value

length range is 6–160 characters.

Coordinates The location map coordinates that the remote device advertised in the

location TLV, including latitude, longitude, and altitude.

ECS ELIN The Emergency Call Service (ECS) Emergency Location Identification

Number (ELIN) that the remote device advertised in the location TLV. The

field range is 10–25.

Unknown The unknown location information for the remote device.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy advertised by the

remote device.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

LLDP Unknown TLVs

Type The unknown TLV type field.

Value The unknown TLV value field.

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual129

as Layer 3 relay agent. In some network configurations, Layer 2 (L2) devices must append

the Relay Agent Information option because they are closer to the end hosts.

An L2 device can operate as a bridge only for a network and might not include an IPv4

address on the network. If an L2 device lacks an IPv4 source address, the device cannot

relay packets directly to a DHCP server that is located on another network. In that situation,

the L2 device can append the Relay Agent Information option and broadcast the DHCP

message.

Enable the DHCP L2 relay

You can enable the DHCP L2 relay.

To enable the DHCP L2 relay:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual130

7. Select the Enable radio button

The default admin mode is disabled.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a DHCP L2 relay interface

You can configure a DHCP L2 relay interface.

To configure a DHCP L2 relay interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual131

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the DHCP L2 relay on the

selected interface.

The default is Disable.

10. From the 82 Option Trust Mode menu, select to enable or disable an interface to be trusted

for DHCP L2 Relay (Option-82) received.

The default is Disable.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual132

View DHCP L2 relay interface statistics

You can view DHCP L2 relay interface statistics.

To view DHCP L2 relay interface statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, VLANs, or al by clicking one of the

following links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual133

• VLAN. Only VLANs are displayed.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Physical interfaces, VLANs, and LAGs are displayed.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Field Description

Interface The interface from which the DHCP message is received.

Untrusted Server

Messages With Opt82

The number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted server.

Untrusted Client

Messages With Opt82

The number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted client.

Trusted Server Messages

Without Opt82

The number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted server.

Trusted Client Messages

Without Opt82

The number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted client.

8. Click the Refresh button to refresh the page with the latest information about the switch.

9. Click the Clear button to reset the statistics.

Configure DHCP snooping

DHCP snooping is a useful feature that provides security by filtering untrusted DHCP

messages and by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table. An untrusted

message is a message that is received from outside the network or firewall and that can

cause traffic attacks within your network. The DHCP snooping binding table contains the

MAC address, IP address, lease time, binding type, VLAN number, and interface information

that corresponds to the local untrusted interfaces of a switch. An untrusted interface is an

interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall. A

trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the

network.

DHCP snooping acts like a firewall between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers. It also

provides way to differentiate between untrusted interfaces connected to the end user and

trusted interfaces connected to the DHCP server or another switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual134

Configure the global DHCP snooping settings

You can view and configure the global settings for DHCP snooping.

To configure the global DHCP snooping settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

7. Select the DHCP Snooping Mode Enable radio button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual135

8. To enable the verification of the sender’s MAC address for DHCP snooping, select the MAC

Address Validation Enable radio button.

When MAC address validation is enabled, the device checks packets that are received on

an untrusted interface to verify that the MAC address and the DHCP client hardware

address match. If the addresses do not match, the device drops the packet.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Enable DHCP for all member interfaces of a VLAN

To enable DHCP snooping for all member interfaces of a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page displays.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN on which DHCP snooping is enabled.

8. From the DHCP Snooping Mode menu, select Enable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual136

Configure DHCP snooping interface settings

You can view and configure each port as a trusted or untrusted port. Any DHCP responses

received on a trusted port are forwarded. If a port is configured as untrusted, any DHCP (or

BootP) responses received on that port are discarded.

To configure DHCP snooping interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Interface Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual137

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Trust Mode menu, select the desired trust mode:

• Disabled. The interface is considered to be untrusted and could potentially be used

to launch a network attack. DHCP server messages are checked against the bindings

database. On untrusted ports, DHCP snooping enforces the following security rules:

-DHCP packets from a DHCP server (DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,

DHCPRELEASEQUERY) are dropped.

-DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE messages are dropped if the MAC address

is in the snooping database but the binding’s interface is other than the interface

where the message was received.

-DHCP packets are dropped when the source MAC address does not match the

client hardware address if MAC address validation is globally enabled.

• Enabled. The interface is considered to be trusted and forwards DHCP server

messages without validation.

10. From the Logging Invalid Packets menu, select the packet logging mode.

When enabled, the DHCP snooping feature generates a log message when an invalid

packet is received and dropped by the interface.

11. In the Rate Limit (pps) field, specify the rate limit value for DHCP snooping purposes.

If the incoming rate of DHCP packets per second exceeds the configured burst interval

per second, the port shuts down. If the rate limit value is N/A, then the burst interval is

also nonapplicable, and rate limiting is disabled.

12. In the Burst Interval (secs) field, specify the burst interval value for rate limiting purposes

on this interface.

If the rate limit is N/A, then the burst interval is also nonapplicable, and the field displays

N/A.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual138

Configure static DHCP bindings

You can view, add, and remove static bindings in the DHCP snooping bindings database and

to view or clear the dynamic bindings in the bindings table.

To configure static DHCP bindings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Binding Configuration.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface on which the DHCP client is authorized.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual139

8. In the MAC Address field, specify the MAC address for the binding to be added.

This is the key to the binding database.

9. From the VLAN ID menu, select the ID of the VLAN the client is authorized to use.

10. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the client.

11. Click the Add button.

The DHCP snooping binding entry is added to the database.

The Dynamic Binding Configuration table shows information about the DHCP bindings that

were learned on each interface on which DHCP snooping is enabled. The following table

describes the dynamic bindings information.

Table 26. DHCP Dynamic Configuration information

Field Description

Interface The interface on which the DHCP client message was received.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with the DHCP client that sent the message. This is the

key to the binding database.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the client interface.

IP Address The IP address assigned to the client by the DHCP server.

Lease Time The remaining IP address lease time for the client.

Configure DHCP snooping persistent settings

You can configure the persistent location of the DHCP snooping bindings database. The

bindings database can be stored locally on the device or on a remote system somewhere

else in the network. The device must be able to reach the IP address of the remote system to

send bindings to a remote database.

To configure DHCP snooping persistent settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual140

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Persistent Configuration.

7. Specify where the DHCP snooping bindings database is located.

• Local. The binding table is stored locally on the switch.

• Remote. The binding table is stored on a remote TFTP server.

If the database is stored on a remote server, specify the following information:

a. Specify the IP address of the TFTP server.

b. Specify the file name of the DHCP snooping bindings database in which the

bindings are stored.

8. In the Write Delay field, specify the time to wait between writing bindings information to

persistent storage.

The delay allows the device to collect as many entries as possible (new and removed)

before writing them to the persistent file.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual141

View or clear DHCP snooping statistics

You can view and clear per-interface statistics about the DHCP messages filtered by the

DHCP snooping feature on untrusted interfaces.

To view or clear the DHCP snooping statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Statistics.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual142

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Click the Clear button to clear all interfaces statistics.

The following table describes the DHCP snooping statistics.

Table 27. DHCP Snooping Statistics information

Field Description

Interface The interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.

MAC Verify Failures The number of DHCP messages that were dropped because the source MAC address

and client hardware address did not match. MAC address verification is performed only if

it is globally enabled.

Client Ifc Mismatch The number of packets that were dropped by DHCP snooping because the interface and

VLAN on which the packet was received do not match the client’s interface and VLAN

information stored in the binding database.

DHCP Server Msgs

Received

The number of DHCP server messages ((DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,

DHCPRELEASEQUERY) that were dropped on an untrusted port.

Configure Dynamic ARP Inspection

Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) is a security feature that rejects invalid and malicious ARP

packets. DAI prevents a class of man-in-the-middle attacks where an unfriendly station

intercepts traffic for other stations by poisoning the ARP caches of its unsuspecting

neighbors. The malicious attacker sends ARP requests or responses mapping another

station’s IP address to its own MAC address.

When DAI is enabled, the switch drops ARP packets whose sender MAC address and sender

IP address do not match an entry in the DHCP snooping bindings database. You can

optionally configure additional ARP packet validation.

When DAI is enabled on a VLAN, DAI is enabled on the interfaces (physical ports or LAGs)

that are members of that VLAN. Individual interfaces are configured as trusted or untrusted.

The trust configuration for DAI is independent of the trust configuration for DHCP snooping.

Configure the global DAI settings

If you configure the source MAC address validation option, DAI verifies that the sender MAC

address in an ARP packet equals the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.

The Ethernet header includes a configurable option to verify that the target MAC address in

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual143

the ARP packet equals the destination MAC address. This check applies only to ARP

responses, since the target MAC address is unspecified in ARP requests. You can also

enable IP address checking. When this option is enabled, DAI drops ARP packets with an

invalid IP address. The following IP addresses are considered invalid:

•0.0.0.0

•255.255.255.255

•All IP multicast addresses

•All class E addresses (240.0.0.0/4)

•Loopback addresses (in the range 127.0.0.0/8)

The valid IP check is applied only on the sender IP address in ARP packets. In ARP

response packets, the check is applied only on the target IP address.

To configure the global DAI settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual144

7. Select the Validate Source MAC Enable radio button.

8. Select the Validate Destination MAC Enable radio button.

9. Select the Validate IP Enable radio button.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The additional ARP validations are performed on packets received on VLANs that are

enabled for DAI and interfaces configured as untrusted.

Configure DAI on a VLAN

In this example, DAI is enabled on VLAN 1. Ports 1–10 connect end users to the network and

are members of VLAN 1. These ports are configured to limit the maximum number of ARP

packets with a rate limit of 10 packets per second. LAG 1, which is also a member of VLAN 1

and contains ports 11–14, is the trunk port that connects the switch to the data center, so it is

configured as a trusted port.

This example assumes that VLAN 1 and LAG 1 are already configured.

To configure DAI on a VLAN1:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual145

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI VLAN Configuration.

7. In the VLAN ID column, select the check box next to VLAN 1.

8. From the Admin Mode menu, select one of the following options:

•Select Enable to enable Dynamic ARP inspection on the selected VLAN.

•Select Disable to disable Dynamic ARP inspection on the selected VLAN.

The default is Disable.

9. From the Invalid Packets menu, select one of the following options:

•Select Enable to enable logging the invalid ARP packet information for the selected

VLAN.

•Select Disable to disable dynamic ARP inspection logging for the selected VLAN.

The default is Enable.

10. In the ARP ACL Name field, enter the name of the ARP access list.

A VLAN can be configured to use this ARP ACL containing rules as the filter for ARP

packet validation. The name can be 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters. The ARP ACL

name is deleted if you specify N/A.

11. From the Static Flag menu, select whether ARP packets need validation by using the

DHCP snooping database if the ARP ACL rules do not match:

•Select Enable to enable validation of ARP packets by ARP ACL rules only.

•Select Disable to enable validation of ARP packets using DHCP snooping entries.

The default is Disable.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual146

Configure DAI on an interface

To configure DAI on LAG1 as a trusted port and rate limiting for ports 1–10:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI Interface Configuration.

7. Click the LAG link to view all LAG interfaces.

8. Next to l1, select the check box.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual147

9. From the Trust Mode menu, select Enable to indicate that the interface is trusted.

The Trust Mode field indicates whether the interface is trusted for dynamic ARP

inspection purposes. All interfaces are untrusted by default.

10. In the Rate Limit (pps) field, specify the rate limit value for dynamic ARP inspection

purposes.

If the incoming rate of ARP packets per second exceeds the configured burst interval per

second, ARP packets are dropped. If this value is None (N/A), no limit exists. The value

can be set to –1, which means N/A. The rate limit range is 0–300. The default is 15

packets per second (pps).

11. In the Burst Interval(secs) field, specify the burst interval value for rate limiting purposes on

this interface.

If the rate limit is None, the burst interval is also nonapplicable and is displayed as N/A.

The burst interval range is 1–15 seconds. The default is 1 second.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

13. To configure rate limiting for ports 1–10, which are untrusted ports, do the following:

a. Click 1 in the interface-selection field to view all ports.

b. Select each check box associated with ports 1–10.

c. In the Rate Limit (pps) field, enter 10.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a DAI ACL

DAI relies on the information in the DHCP snooping bindings database to validate ARP

packets. For networks that use static IP addresses and do not use DHCP, DAI access control

lists (ACLs) can be used to statically map an IP address to a MAC address on a VLAN. When

hosts use static IP addresses, the DHCP snooping feature cannot build a bindings database.

DAI ACLs are also useful when other switches in the network do not run DAI.

DAI consults the static mappings configured in the DAI ACLs before it consults the DHCP

snooping bindings database; thus static mappings receive precedence over DHCP snooping

bindings. If the static flag is enabled on a VLAN, DAI consults the DAI ACL only and does not

validate ARP information against the DHCP snooping bindings database.

To configure a DAI ACL with three rules and associate it with VLAN 100:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual148

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI ACL Configuration.

The DAI ACL Configuration page displays.

7. In the Name field, specify a name for the ACL.

For example, enter arpACL.

8. Click the Add button.

The page displays the new ACL.

9. Click the ACL name.

The ACL name is a hyperlink to the Dynamic ARP Inspection ACL Rule Configuration

page.

10. From the ACL Name menu, select the DAI ACL to configure.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual149

11. In the Source IP Address field, specify the IP address of a host.

12. In the Source MAC Address field, specify the MAC address of the host that is statically

mapped to the IP address specified in the Source IP Address field.

13. Click the Add button.

The rule is added to the table.

14. Repeat Step 11 through Step 13 to add a second rule.

You can add up to 20 static IP address–MAC address mappings to a DAI ACL.

15. Select System> Services > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI VLAN Configuration.

16. Next to a VLAN, select the check box.

17. In the ARP ACL Name field, specify the name of the DAI ACL to associate with the VLAN.

For example, enter ARP_ACL.

18. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual150

View DAI Statistics per VLAN

To view DAI statistics per VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Services > Dynamic ARP Inspection > DAI Statistics.

The DAI Statistics page displays.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable DAI statistics information that is

displayed.

Field Description

VLAN The enabled VLAN ID for which statistics are displayed.

DHCP Drops The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI because no matching DHCP

snooping binding entry was found.

DHCP Permits The number of ARP packets that were forwarded by DAI because a matching DHCP

snooping binding was entry found.

ACL Drops The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI because no matching ARP

ACL rule was found for this VLAN and the static flag is set on this VLAN.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual151

7. Click the Refresh button to refresh the data on the page with the latest DAI statistics from

the device.

8. Click the Clear button to clear the DAI statistics.

Set up PoE timer schedules

The switch lets you define multiple timer schedules that you can use for PoE power delivery

to attached PDs.

After you create a timer schedule, you can associate it with one or more PoE ports (see

Configure the PoE port settings on page 102). You can use a separate timer schedule for

each PoE port.

After you associate a timer schedule with a PoE port, the start date and time force the PoE

port to stop delivering power and the stop date and time enable the PoE port to start

delivering power.

You can create absolute schedules, which apply to specific dates and times, and you can

create recurring schedules.

Create a PoE timer schedule

The maximum number of timer schedules that you can add is 100.

To create a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

ACL Permits The number of ARP packets that were permitted by DAI because a matching ARP

ACL rule was found for this VLAN.

Bad Source MAC The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as the sender MAC address

in the ARP packet did not match the source MAC in the Ethernet header.

Bad Dest MAC The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as the target MAC address in

the ARP reply packet did not match the destination MAC in the Ethernet header.

Invalid IP The number of ARP packets that were dropped by DAI as the sender IP address in

the ARP packet, or target IP address in the ARP reply packet, is not valid. Invalid

addresses include 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255, IP multicast addresses, class E

addresses (240.0.0.0/4), and loopback addresses (127.0.0.0/8).

Forwarded The number of valid ARP packets forwarded by DAI.

Dropped The number of invalid ARP packets dropped by DAI.

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual152

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Name page displays.

7. In the Timer Schedule Name field, specify the name for a timer schedule.

8. Click the Add button.

The timer schedule is added to the table on the Timer Schedule Name page and is

assigned an ID.

Specify the settings for an absolute PoE timer schedule

An absolute timer schedule applies to specific dates and times. The schedule is executed

once only.

To specify the settings for a PoE timer schedule that uses specific dates and times:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual153

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

7. In the Timer Schedule Selection section, make your selections from the following menus:

a. Timer Schedule Name. Select the name of the timer schedule that you want to

configure.

You can select only names of schedules that you created (see Create a PoE timer

schedule on page 151).

b. Timer Schedule Type. Select Absolute.

The fields in the Timer Schedule Configuration section might adjust to let you configure

a timer schedule for specific dates and times.

c. Timer Schedule Entry. To add a new entry, select new.

Selecting an existing entry lets you make changes to that entry.

8. In the Timer Schedule Configuration section, specify the times and dates:

a. In the Time Start field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must start.

b. In the Time End field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must stop.

c. Next to the Date Start field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must start.

d. Next to the Date End field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must stop.

9. Click the Add button.

The entry for the timer schedule is added.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual154

Specify the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule

A recurring schedule allows you to set up a single schedule that starts at a particular date and

that recurs either with a specific end date or indefinitely.

For a single recurring PoE timer schedule, you can add a daily, weekly, and monthly schedule

configuration. That is, these schedule configurations are not mutually exclusive but

complement each other.

To specify the settings for a PoE timer schedule that uses a recurring pattern:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

7. In the Timer Schedule Selection section, make your selections from the following menus:

a. Timer Schedule Name. Select the name of the timer schedule that you want to

configure.

You can select only names of schedules that you created (see Create a PoE timer

schedule on page 151).

b. Timer Schedule Type. Select Periodic.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual155

The fields in the Timer Schedule Configuration section might adjust to let you configure

a timer schedule with a recurrence pattern.

c. Timer Schedule Entry. To add a new entry, select new.

Selecting an existing entry lets you make changes to that entry.

8. In the Timer Schedule Configuration section, specify the recurrence pattern:

a. In the Time Start field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must start.

b. In the Time End field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must stop.

c. Next to the Date Start field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must start.

d. Either select the No End Date radio button or select the End Date radio button, and

next to the End Date field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must stop.

e. From the Recurrence Pattern menu, select the pattern:

• Daily. The timer schedule works with daily recurrence. The fields adjust.

Either select the Every Weekday radio button to let the schedule operate from

Monday through Friday or select the Every Day(s) radio button and enter a

number from 0 to 255 in the field.

In the latter case, the schedule is triggered every specified number of days. If the

number of days is not specified, or if you enter 0, then the schedule is triggered

only once.

• Weekly. The timer schedule works with weekly recurrence. The fields adjust.

In the Every Week(s) field, enter a number from 0 to 255 to specify that the

schedule must be triggered every specified number of weeks. If the number of

weeks is not specified, or if you enter 0, then the schedule is triggered only once.

Select a single Week Day check box, multiple check boxes, or all check boxes to

specify the day or days of the week that the schedule must operate.

• Monthly. The timer schedule works with monthly recurrence. The fields adjust.

In the Day field, enter a number from 1 to 31 to specify the day of the month when

the schedule must be triggered.

In the Every Month(s) field, enter a number from 0 to 255 to specify that the

schedule must be triggered every specified number of months. If the number of

months is not specified, or if you enter 0, then the schedule is triggered only once.

9. Click the Add button.

The entry for the timer schedule is added.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual156

Change the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule

entry

You can change the settings for an existing recurring PoE timer schedule entry. (You cannot

do this for an existing absolute PoE timer schedule.)

To change the settings for an existing recurring PoE timer schedule entry:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

7. From the Timer Schedule Name menu, select the schedule name.

8. From the Timer Schedule Type menu, select the schedule type.

9. From the Timer Schedule Entry menu, select the schedule entry.

10. Make the changes to the schedule entry.

For more information, see Specify the settings for a recurring PoE timer schedule on

page 154.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual157

Delete a PoE timer schedule entry

You can delete a PoE timer schedule entry that you no longer need.

To delete a PoE timer schedule entry:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login. You must change this password at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

7. From the Timer Schedule Name menu, select the schedule name.

8. From the Timer Schedule Type menu, select the schedule type.

9. From the Timer Schedule Entry menu, select the schedule entry.

10. Click the Delete button.

The entry is deleted.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure System Information User Manual158

Delete a PoE timer schedule

You can delete a PoE timer schedule that you no longer need. All entries that are part of the

PoE timer schedule are also deleted.

To delete a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Name page displays.

7. Select the check box for the schedule that you want to delete.

8. Click the Delete button.

The schedule is deleted.

159

3Configure Switching

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Configure the port settings and maximum frame size

•Configure link aggregation groups

•Configure VLANs

•Configure Auto-VoIP

•Configure Spanning Tree Protocol

•Configure multicast

•Manage IGMP snooping

•Manage MLD snooping

•Configure multicast VLAN registration

•View, search, and manage the MAC address table

•Configure Layer 2 loop protection

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual160

Configure the port settings and maximum

frame size

You can view, configure, and monitor the physical port information for the ports (that is, the

physical interfaces) on the switch.

To configure the port settings and maximum frame size:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Ports > Port Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual161

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. To set the global frame size, in the Frame Size field, specify the maximum Ethernet frame

size that an interface can support. The frame size includes Ethernet header, CRC, and

payload.

The range is 1522 to 10000. The default maximum frame size is 1522.

You cannot set the frame size for individual interfaces.

The minimum range of frame size is 1522 bytes. It is defined in IEEE 802.3 and

calculated with Layer 2 Ethernet frame. (with the optional IEEE 802.1Q VLAN/QoS tag)

9. Select the check box to the left of the Port column to specify the interface for which data is

to be displayed or configured.

To select an interface, you can also enter the interface number in the Go To Interface

field and click the Go button.

10. In the Description field, enter the description string to be attached to a port.

The string can be up to 64 characters in length.

11. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

This sets the port control administrative mode. You must select Enable in order for the

port to participate in the network. The default is Enable.

12. From the Auto-negotiation menu, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies the autonegotiation mode for this port. The default is Enable.

Note: After you change the autonegotiation mode, the switch might be

inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

13. In the Speed field, specify the speed value for the selected port.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual162

Possible field values are as follows:

• Auto. All supported speeds.

•1

0. 10 Mbits/second

• 100. 100 Mbits/second

The delimiter characters for setting different speed values are a comma (,), a period (.)

and a space ( ). The default is Auto.

Note: After you change the speed value, the switch might be inaccessible for

a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

14. From the Duplex Mode menu, select the duplex mode for the selected port.

Possible values are as follows:

• Auto. Indicates that speed is set by the auto-negotiation process.

• Full. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in both

directions simultaneously.

•Half. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in only

one direction at a time.

The default is Auto.

Note: After you change the duplex mode, the switch might be inaccessible for

a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

15. Use the Link Trap menu to specify whether or not to send a trap when link status changes.

The Link Trap menu is enabled by default. However, for LAG interfaces, the menu is

disabled.

16. From the Flow Control menu, select the configuration for IEEE 802.3 flow control:

• Disable. If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames, and

data loss could occur. This is the default setting.

• Symmetric. If the port buffers become full, the switch sends pause frames to stop

traffic.

Flow control helps to prevent data loss when the port cannot keep up with the number

of frames being switched. When you enable flow control, the switch can send a pause

frame to stop traffic on the port if the amount of memory used by the packets on the

port exceeds a preconfigured threshold and responds to pause requests from partner

devices. The paused port does not forward packets for the time that is specified in the

pause frame. When the pause frame time elapses, or the utilization returns to a

specified low threshold, the switch enables the port to again transmit frames. The

switch also honors incoming pause frames by temporarily halting transmission.

• Asymmetric. If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames,

and data loss could occur. However, the switch does honor incoming pause frames by

temporarily halting transmission.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual163

17. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 28. Port Configuration information

Field Description

Port Type For normal ports this field is blank. Otherwise, the possible values are as follows:

Physical Status The port speed and duplex mode.

Link Status Indicates whether the link is up or down.

MAC Address The physical address of the specified interface.

PortList Bit Offset The bit offset value that corresponds to the port when the MIB object type PortList is

used to manage in SNMP

ifIndex The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.

Configure link aggregation groups

Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port channels, allow you to

combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the

aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load

sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. The LAG by default

becomes a member of the default management VLAN (that is, VLAN 1).

A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must

participate in the same protocols. A static port channel interface does not require a partner

system to be able to aggregate its member ports.

The switch supports static LAGs. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, the port

neither transmits nor receives LACPDUs.

The switch supports 16 LAGs.

Configure LAG settings

You can group one or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group, which is also known as a port channel. The switch treats the LAG as if it

were a single link.

• Mirrored. The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic is copied to the probe

port.

• Probe. Use this port to monitor a mirrored port.

• Trunk Member. The port is a member of a link aggregation trunk. Look at the LAG

pages for more information.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual164

To configure LAG settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Configuration.

7. In the LAG Name field, enter a name for the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be

specified for you to create the LAG.

8. In the Description field, enter the description string to be attached to a LAG.

The description can be up to 64 characters in length.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that

form the LAG are not released. The default is Enable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual165

10. From the Hash Mode menu, select the load-balancing mode for a port channel (LAG):

• 1 Src/Dest MAC, incoming port. This mode uses the source and destination MAC

addresses and incoming port that are associated with the packet.

•2 Src IP and Src TCP/UDP Port fields. This mode uses the source IP address and

source TCP or UDP port value that are associated with the packet.

• 3 Dest IP and Dest TCP/UDP Port fields. This mode uses the destination IP address

and destination TCP or UDP port value that are associated with the packet.

• 4 Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port fields. This mode uses the source and destination

MAC addresses and the source and destination TCP or UDP port values that are

associated with the packet.

Note: The switch balances traffic on a port channel (LAG) by selecting one

of the links in the channel over which packets must be transmitted. The

switch selects the link by creating a binary pattern from selected fields

in a packet and associating that pattern with a particular link.

11. From the STP Mode menu, select the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) administrative mode

associated with the LAG. The possible values are as follows:

• Disable. Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.

• Enable. Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.

12. From the Link Trap menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether to send a trap when

the link status changes.

The default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.

13. From the LAG Type menu, select Static or LACP:

• Static. Disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the selected LAG. The

LAG is configured manually. The default is Static.

• LACP. Disables LACP on the selected LAG. The LAG is configured automatically.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 29. LAG Configuration information

Field Description

LAG ID Identification of the LAG.

Active Ports Indicates the ports that are actively participating in the port channel.

LAG State Indicates whether the link is up or down.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual166

Configure LAG membership

You can select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a port channel. The switch can treat the

port channel as a single link.

To configure LAG membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Membership.

7. From the LAG ID menu, select the LAG ID.

8. In the LAG Name field, enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual167

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be

specified for you to create the LAG.

9. In the Ports table, click each port that you want to include as a member of the selected

LAG.

A selected port is displayed by a check mark.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Set the LACP system priority

You can set the LACP system priority that applies to all LAGs on the switch.

To set the LACP system priority:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual168

7. In the LACP System Priority field, specify the device’s link aggregation priority relative to

the devices at the other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled.

A higher value indicates a lower priority. You can change the value of the setting globally

by specifying a priority from 1 to 65535. The default value is 32768.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Set the LACP port priority settings

You can configure the LACP priority value and administrative LACP time-out value for a port.

To configure LACP port priority settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual169

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Port Configuration.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. In the LACP Priority field, specify the LACP priority value for the selected interfaces.

This value specifies the device’s link aggregation priority relative to the devices at the

other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled. A higher value indicates a

lower priority. The range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 128.

9. In the Timeout field, configure the administrative LACP time-out value:

•Long. Specifies a long time-out value.

• Short. Specifies a short time-out value.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure VLANs

Adding virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both

bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2

header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which

provides better administration, security, and management of multicast traffic.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual170

By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically

separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast

packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be

grouped by logical function instead of physical location.

Each VLAN in a network is assigned an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE

802.1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station can omit

the tag, or the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the packet

can either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A given port can handle traffic for

more than one VLAN, but it can support only one default VLAN ID.

You can define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table. The switch supports up

to 256 VLANs. VLAN 1 is created by default and is the default VLAN of which all ports are

members.

The following VLANs are preconfigured on the switch and you cannot delete them:

• VLAN 1. The default VLAN of which all ports are members.

• VLAN 4088. The default Auto-VoIP VLAN. By default, this VLAN does not include any

members but you can manually add members.

• VLAN 4089. The Auto-Video VLAN. By default, this VLAN does not include any members

but you can manually add members

Configure VLAN settings

Add a VLAN

To add a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual171

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier for the new VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID can be from 2 to 4093, excluding 4088 and 4089. (The default

VLANs are 1, 4088, and 4089).

8. In the VLAN Name field, specify a name for the VLAN.

The VLAN name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The

default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.

The VLAN Type field displays the type of the VLAN that you are configuring:

•The type for VLAN ID 1 is always Default.

•The type for VLAN ID 4088 is always Auto-VoIP

•The type for VLAN ID 4089 is always Auto-Video.

When you create a VLAN on the VLAN Configuration page, by default, the type that is

assigned is Static. A VLAN that is created through the GVRP registration process is

assigned a type of Dynamic (GVRP). The type that is assigned to an Auto-Video VLAN is

Auto-Video.

9. Click the Add button.

The VLAN is added to the switch.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual172

Delete a VLAN

To delete a VLAN from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier.

The range of the VLAN ID can be from 1 to 4093.

Note: You cannot delete VLANs 1, 4088, and 4089, all of which are

predefined.

8. Click the Delete button.

The VLAN is removed.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual173

Reset the VLAN configuration on the switch to the default settings

If you reset the VLAN configuration on the switch to the default settings, all VLANs that you

added are deleted. (The predefined VLANS are not deleted).

The VLAN default values are as follows:

•All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.

•All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.

•All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.

•All ports are configured with ingress filtering disabled.

•All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.

•GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared.

To reset the VLAN configuration on the switch to the default settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

You can also select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the Reset Configuration check box.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual174

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Your settings are saved. Except for the predefined default VLANs, all VLANs are deleted.

Configure VLAN membership

To configure VLAN membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Membership.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual175

7. In the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

8. In the Group Operation menu, select one of the following options, which applies to all ports

in the VLAN:

• Untag All. For all ports that are members of the VLAN, tags are removed from all

egress packets.

• Tag All. For all ports that are members of the VLAN, all egress packets are tagged.

• Remove All. All ports that were dynamically registered through GVRP are removed

from the VLAN.

9. In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the port to the default settings:

• T (Tagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.

The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• U (Untagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN

but can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through GVRP.

10. In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the LAG to the default settings:

• T (Tagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

tagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• U (Untagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN

but can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through GVRP.

11. Click the Apply button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual176

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 30. Advanced VLAN membership

Field Definition

VLAN Name The name for the VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32

alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. VLAN ID 1 always

uses the name Default.

VLAN Type The VLAN type:

View the VLAN status

You can view the status of all currently configured VLANs.

To view the VLAN status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present.

• Auto-VoIP (VLAN ID = 4088). Always present.

• Auto-VIdeo (VLAN ID = 4089). Always present.

• Static. A VLAN that you configured.

• Dynamic. A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not

convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual177

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Status.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 31. VLAN status

Field Definition

VLAN ID The VLAN identifier (VID) of the VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1

to 4093.

VLAN Name The name of the VLAN. VLAN ID 1 is always named Default.

VLAN Type The VLAN type:

Routing Interface The interface associated with the VLAN, in the case that VLAN routing

is configured for this VLAN.

Member Ports The ports that are included in the VLAN.

Configure the PVID settings

You can assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface. The following requirements apply to a

PVID:

•You must define a PVID for all ports.

•If no other value is specified, the default VLAN PVID is used.

•To change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as

a member (see Configure VLAN membership on page 174).

• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present.

• Auto-VoIP (VLAN ID = 4088). Always present.

• Auto-Video (VLAN ID = 4089). Always present.

• Static. A VLAN that you configured.

• Dynamic. A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not

convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual178

To configure the PVID settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Port PVID Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. To display information for all physical ports and LAGs, click the ALL link.

9. Select interfaces by selecting the Interface check boxes next to the interfaces.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual179

You can select multiple interfaces. To select all the interfaces, select the Interface check

box in the heading row.

10. In the PVID field, specify the VLAN ID to assign to untagged or priority-tagged frames

received on this port.

The default is 1.

11. In the VLAN Member field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a member port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. The default is 1. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a

comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted.

12. In the VLAN Tag field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a tagged port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to

separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted. To reset the VLAN tag

configuration to the defaults, use the None keyword. Port tagging for the VLAN can be

set only if the port is a member of this VLAN.

13. From the Acceptable Frame menu, specify the types of frames that can be received on this

port.

The options are VLAN only and Admit All:

•VLAN only. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are

discarded.

• Admit All. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are

accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for this port. With either option,

VLAN-tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.

14. From the Ingress Filtering menu, select one of the following options:

• Enable. The frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which

this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in

the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the port VLAN ID specified for the port that

received this frame.

• Disable. All frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge

specification. The default is Disable.

15. In the Port Priority field, specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets

arriving at the port.

You can enter a number from 0 to 7.

16. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 32. Nonconfigurable fields on the PVID Configuration page

Field Description

Current Ingress Filtering Indicates whether ingress filtering is enabled for the interface.

Untagged VLANs The number of untagged VLANs for the interface.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual180

Configure a MAC-based VLAN

The MAC-Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN

and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet.

You define a MAC-to-VLAN mapping by configuring an entry in the MAC-to-VLAN table. An

entry is specified through a source MAC address and the desired VLAN ID. The

MAC-to-VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device (that is, a system-wide

table exists with MAC address–to–VLAN ID mappings).

When untagged or priority-tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the

MAC-to-VLAN table, the source MAC address of the packet is looked up. If an entry is found,

the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. If the packet is already priority tagged

it maintains this value. Otherwise, the priority is set to zero. The assigned VLAN ID is verified

against the VLAN table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues.

Otherwise, the packet is dropped. This implies that the user is allowed to configure a MAC

address mapping to a VLAN that was not created on the system.

Add a MAC-based VLAN

To add a MAC-based VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

Tagged VLANs The number of tagged VLANs for the interface.

Forbidden VLANs The number of forbidden VLANs for the interface.

Dynamic VLANs The number of dynamically added VLANs for the interface.

Table 32. Nonconfigurable fields on the PVID Configuration page (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual181

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN.

7. In the MAC Address field, enter a valid MAC address to be bound to a VLAN ID.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN is created.

8. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093.

9. Click the Add button.

The MAC address is added to the VLAN mapping.

Delete a MAC address from VLAN mapping

To delete a MAC address from VLAN mapping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual182

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN.

The MAC Based VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. In the MAC Address field, enter a valid MAC address.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN exists.

8. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093.

9. Click the Delete button.

The MAC address is removed from the VLAN mapping.

Configure protocol-based VLAN groups

You can use a protocol-based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets. By

default, if you do not configure any port-based (IEEE 802.1Q) or protocol-based VLANs,

untagged packets are assigned to VLAN 1. You can override this behavior by defining either

port-based VLANs or protocol-based VLANs, or both. Tagged packets are always handled

according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard and are not included in protocol-based VLANs.

If you assign a port to a protocol-based VLAN for a specific protocol, untagged frames

received on that port for that protocol are assigned the protocol-based VLAN ID. Untagged

frames received on the port for other protocols are assigned the port VLAN ID, either the

default PVID (1) or a PVID you specifically assigned to the port using the Port VLAN

Configuration page.

You define a protocol-based VLAN by creating a group. Each group forms a one-to-one

relationship with a VLAN ID, can include one to three protocol definitions, and can include

multiple ports. When you create a group, you specify a name and a group ID is assigned

automatically.

To configure a protocol-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual183

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration.

7. In the Group Name field, type a name for the new group.

You can enter up to 16 characters.

8. In the Protocol field, enter one or more protocols that must be associated with the group.

You can enter keywords such as arp, ip, and ipx. Separate keywords with a comma. You

can also enter hexadecimal or decimal values in the range of 0x0600 (1536) to 0xFFFF

(65535).

9. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

The ID can be any number in the range of 1 to 4093. All the ports in the group assign this

VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols that you included in this group.

10. Click the Add button.

The protocol-based VLAN group is added to the switch.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual184

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 33. Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration information

Field Description

Group ID A number used to identify the group created by the user. Group IDs are

automatically assigned when a group is created by the user.

Ports Display all the member ports that belong to the group.

Configure protocol-based VLAN group membership

To configure protocol-based VLAN group membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual185

7. From the Group ID menu, select the protocol-based VLAN group ID.

The Group Name field shows the name that is associated with the group.

8. In the Ports table and LAG table, click each port and LAG that you want to include in the

protocol-based VLAN group.

A protocol-based VLAN group can include both port and LAGs. A selected port or LAG is

displayed by a check mark.

9. Click the Apply button

Your settings are saved.

10. To show the current numbers in the selected protocol-based VLAN group, click the Current

Members button.

Configure a voice VLAN

You can configure the settings for a voice VLAN configuration.

To configure a voice VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual186

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Voice VLAN Configuration.

7. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies the administrative mode for the voice VLAN for the switch. The default is

Disable.

8. Select the interface by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual187

9. From the Interface Mode menu, select the voice VLAN mode for selected interfaces:

• Disable. This is the default value.

•None. Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.

•VLAN ID. Configure the phone to send tagged voice traffic.

•dot1p. Configure voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic. When this is

selected, enter the dot1p value in the Value field.

• Untagged. Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.

10. In the Value field, enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value.

This field is enabled only when VLAN ID or dot1p is selected as the interface mode.

11. In the CoS Override Mode field, select Disable or Enable.

The default is Disable.

12. In the Authentication Mode field, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Enable. When the authentication mode is enabled, voice traffic is allowed

on an unauthorized voice VLAN port. When the authentication mode is disabled, devices

are authorized through dot1x.

Note: Authentication through dot1x is possible only if dot1x is enabled.

13. In the DSCP Value field, configure the Voice VLAN DSCP value for the port.

The valid range is 0 to 64. The default value is 0.

The Operational State field displays the operational status of the voice VLAN on the given

interface.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure GARP switch settings

The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) is used to exchange information

between GARP participants to register and deregister attribute values within a bridged LAN.

When a GARP participant declares or withdraws a given attribute, the attribute value is

recorded with the applicant state machine for that attribute, for the port from which the

declaration or withdrawal was made.

•Registration occurs only on ports that receive the GARP PDU containing a declaration or

withdrawal.

•Deregistration occurs only if all GARP participants connected to the same LAN segment

as the port withdraw the declaration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual188

GARP is part of the IEEE 802.1p extension to its 802.1D (spanning tree) specification. It

includes the following:

• GARP Information Declaration (GID). The part of GARP that generates data.

• GARP Information Propagation (GIP). The part of GARP that distributes data.

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for the GARP configuration changes to

take effect.

To configure GARP switch settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Switch Configuration.

7. Select the GVRP Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual189

This selects the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the switch.

The default is Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure GARP ports

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for the GARP configuration changes to

take effect.

To configure GARP ports:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Port Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual190

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the GVRP Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the port. If

you select Disable, the protocol is not active and the join time, leave time, and leave all

time options are without any effect. The default is Disable.

10. In the Join Timer field, specify the time in centiseconds between the transmission of GARP

PDUs registering (or reregistering) membership for a VLAN or multicast group.

Enter a number between 10 and 100 (0.1 to 1.0 seconds). The default is 20 centiseconds

(0.2 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port.

11. In the Leave Timer field, specify the time in centiseconds to wait after receiving an

unregister request for a VLAN or multicast group before deleting the associated entry.

This allows time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute to maintain

uninterrupted service. Enter a number between 20 and 600 (0.2 to 6.0 seconds). The

default is 60 centiseconds (0.6 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP

participant for each port.

12. In the Leave All Timer field, specify how frequently (in centiseconds) LeaveAll PDUs are

generated.

A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will be deregistered soon. To maintain

registration, participants must rejoin. The leave all period timer is set to a random value in

the range of LeaveAllTime to 1.5 * LeaveAllTime. The timer is specified in centiseconds.

Enter a number between 200 and 6000 (2 to 60 seconds). The default is 1000

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual191

centiseconds (10 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for

each port.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Auto-VoIP

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) enables telephone calls over a data network. Because

voice traffic is typically more time-sensitive than data traffic, the Auto-VoIP feature helps

provide a classification mechanism for voice packets so that they can be prioritized above

data packets in order to provide better Quality of Service (QoS). With the Auto-VoIP feature,

voice prioritization is provided based on call-control protocols (SIP) or OUI bits.

Configure the Auto-VoIP protocol-based settings

To prioritize time-sensitive voice traffic over data traffic, protocol-based Auto-VoIP checks for

packets carrying the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) VoIP protocol.

VoIP frames that are received on ports that for which the Auto-VoIP feature is enabled are

marked with the specified CoS traffic class value.

To configure the Auto-VoIP protocol-based settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual192

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Protocol-based > Port Settings.

7. In the Protocol Based Global Settings section, specify the following global settings:

a. From the Prioritization Type menu, select Traffic Class or Remark.

This specifies the type of prioritization.

b. From the Class Value menu, specify the CoS class value to be reassigned for packets

that the voice VLAN receives.

8. In the Protocol Based Global Settings section, specify the Auto VoIP Mode settings:

a. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the

following links above the table heading:

•1

(the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the

default setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

b. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or

type the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the

heading row.

c. From the Auto VoIP Mode menu, select to enable or disable the Auto VoIP mode for

the interface or interfaces.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual193

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the Auto-VoIP OUI-based properties

With Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI)–based Auto-VoIP, voice prioritization is

provided based on OUI bits.

To configure the Auto-VoIP OUI-based properties:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Properties.

7. In the Auto-VoIP VLAN ID field, enter the VoIP VLAN ID for the switch.

By default, an Auto-VoIP with VLAN ID 2 exists.

8. From the OUI-based priority menu, select the OUI-based priority of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual194

The default value is 7.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the OUI-based port settings

The port settings page allows you to configure the OUI port settings.

To configure the OUI-based port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Port Settings.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual195

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Auto VoIP Mode menu, select Disable or Enable.

Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.

The Operational Status field displays the current operational status of each interface.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual196

Manage the OUI table

Device hardware manufacturers can include an OUI in a network adapter to help identify a

hardware device. The OUI is a unique 24-bit number assigned by the IEEE registration

authority. The switch comes preconfigured with the following OUIs that identify the IP phone

manufacturer:

•00:01:E3: SIEMENS

•00:03:6B: CISCO1

•00:12:43: CISCO2

•00:60:B9: NITSUKO

•00:D0:1E: PINTEL

•00:E0:75: VERILINK

•00:E0:BB: 3COM

•00:04:0D: AVAYA1

•00:1B:4F: AVAYA2

You can select an existing OUI or add a new OUI and description to identify the IP phones on

the network.

Configure the OUI table

To configure the OUI table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual197

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

7. In the Telephony OUI(s) field, specify the VoIP OUI prefix to be added in the format

AA:BB:CC.

You can configure up to 32 OUIs.

8. In the Description field, enter the description for the OUI.

The maximum length of description is 32 characters. The following OUIs are present in

the configuration by default:

•00:01:E3 - SIEMENS

•00:03:6B - CISCO1

•00:12:43 - CISCO2

•00:60:B9 - NITSUKO

•00:D0:1E - PINTEL

•00:E0:75 - VERILINK

•00:E0:BB - 3COM

•00:04:0D - AVAYA1

•00:1B:4F - AVAYA2

9. Click the Add button.

The telephony OUI entry is added.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual198

Delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table

To delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

The OUI Table page displays.

7. Select the check box next to each OUI prefix to be removed.

8. Click the Delete button.

The telephony OUI entries are removed.

Display the Auto-VoIP status

You can display the Auto-VoIP status.

To view the Auto-VoIP status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual199

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Auto-VoIP Status.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Auto-VoIP status information.

Table 34. Auto-VoIP status

Field Description

Auto-VoIP VLAN ID The Auto-VoIP VLAN ID.

Maximum Number of Voice

Channels Supported

The maximum number of voice channels supported.

Number of Voice Channels

Detected

The number of VoIP channels prioritized successfully.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual200

Configure Spanning Tree Protocol

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of network

devices. STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops.

STP (also referred to as “classic” STP) provides a single path between end stations, avoiding

and eliminating loops. For information about configuring the global STP settings for the

switch, see Configure the STP settings and view the STP status on page 200.

The switch support the following spanning tree versions:

• CST. Common STP. For information on configuring CST, see Configure the CST Settings

on page 202 and Configure the CST port settings on page 204.

• MSTP. Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP, also referred to as MST) supports

multiple instances of spanning tree to efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different

interfaces. For information on configuring MSTP, see Manage the MST settings on

page 210 and Configure and view the port settings for an MST instance on page 213.

• RSTP. Rapid STP. Each instance of the spanning tree behaves in the manner specified in

IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight modifications in the working but

not the end effect (chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to the

forwarding state). For information on viewing the RSTP state, see View the Rapid STP

information on page 209.

The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to

configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports that are connected to end

stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the forwarding state and the

suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are represented by the

parameters pointtopoint and edgeport. MSTP is compatible with both RSTP and STP. It

behaves in a way that is appropriate for STP and RSTP bridges. An MSTP bridge can be

configured to behave entirely as an RSTP bridge or an STP bridge.

Note: For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version must be

802.1s and their configuration names, digest keys, and revision levels

must match. For additional information about regions and their effect

on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

Configure the STP settings and view the STP status

You can configure the STP settings and view the STP status on the switch.

To configure the STP settings and view the STP status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual201

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Basic > STP Configuration.

7. Configure the following options:

• Spanning Tree State. Enable or disable the spanning tree operation on the switch.

• STP Operation Mode. Specify the STP version for the switch. The options are STP,

RSTP, and MSTP.

• Configuration Name. Specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently

being used. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

• Configuration Revision Level. Specify an identifier used to identify the configuration

currently being used. The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value

is 0.

• Forward BPDU while STP Disabled. Enable or disable the BPDU Flood. This

specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded or not while spanning tree is

disabled on the switch.

8. Click the Apply button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual202

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable STP Status fields displayed on the page.

Table 35. STP configuration status

Field Description

Configuration Digest Key Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

STP Status

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and

the base MAC address of the bridge.

Time Since Topology Change The time in day-hour-minute-second format since the topology of the CST

last changed.

Topology Change Count The number of times that the topology changed for the CST.

Topology Change The value of the topology change setting for the switch indicating whether a

topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST. Possible

values are True and False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority

and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Root Path Cost Path cost to the designated root for the CST.

Root Port Port to access the designated root for the CST.

Max Age (secs) The maximum age timer controls the maximum length of time in seconds

that passes before a bridge port saves its configuration BPDU information.

Forward Delay (secs) The derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay setting.

Hold Time (secs) Minimum time in seconds between the transmission of configuration

BPDUs.

CST Regional Root Priority and base MAC address of the CST regional root.

CST Path Cost Path cost to the CST tree regional root.

Configure the CST Settings

You can configure a common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree on the switch.

To configure the CST settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual203

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Configuration.

7. Specify the CST options:

• Bridge Priority. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a

priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes

the root bridge. Specify the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST). The valid range is 0–61440. The bridge priority is a multiple of

4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically

set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if you set the

priority to any value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the value to 0.

The default value is 32768.

• Bridge Max Age (secs). The bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a bridge must wait before

implementing a topological change. The valid range is 6–40, and the value must be

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual204

less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or equal to 2 *

(Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.

• Bridge Hello Time (secs). The bridge hello time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a root bridge must wait

between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds. The value must be

less than or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) – 1. The default hello time value is 2.

• Bridge Forward Delay (secs). The bridge forward delay time, which indicates the

time in seconds a bridge must remains in a listening and learning state before

forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1.

The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.

• Spanning Tree Maximum Hops. The maximum number of bridge hops the

information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The valid

range is 6–40. The default is 20 hops.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the MSTP Status information that is displayed.

Table 36. STP advanced CST configuration, MSTP status

Field Description

MST ID Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the

corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.

VID ID Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID

associated with each of them.

FID ID Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs

associated with each of them.

Configure the CST port settings

You can configure a common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree on a specific

port on the switch.

A port can become diagnostically disabled (D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe

error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU

flooding. The flooding criteria are such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a

3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.

To configure the CST port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual205

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the STP Status menu, select the option to enable or disable the spanning tree

administrative mode associated with the port or port channel.

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Enable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual206

10. From the Fast Link menu, select whether the specified port is an edge port within the CST.

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Disable.

11. From the BPDU Forwarding menu, configure BPDU forwarding.

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Disable. When BPDU

forwarding is enabled, the switch forwards the BPDU traffic arriving on this port when

STP is disabled on this port.

12. From the Auto Edge menu, specify if the port is allowed to become an edge port if it does

not detect BPDUs for some duration.

The possible values are Enable and Disable. The default value is Enable.

13. In the Path Cost field, set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the common

and internal spanning tree.

Specify a value in the range of 0 to 200000000. The default is 0. When the path cost is set

to 0, the value is updated with the external path cost from a received STP packet.

14. In the Priority field, specify the priority for a particular port within the CST.

The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if you attempt to set the priority to

any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If you try to set it to any value between 16 and

(2*16 – 1), it is set to 16, and so on. The range is 0 to 240. The default value is 128.

15. In the External Port Path Cost field, set the external path cost to a new value for the

specified port in the spanning tree.

The value range is 0 to 200000000. The default is 0.

16. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

17. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 37. CST port configuration

Field Description

Port State The forwarding state of this port. The default is Disabled.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the CST. It is made up

from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Hello Timer The value of the setting for the CST. The default is 2 seconds.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual207

View the CST port status

You can display the common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree for a specific

port on the switch.

To view the CST port status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Status.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual208

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the page.

Table 38. CST port status

Field Description

Interface Identify the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs

associated with the CST.

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each

spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root Port,

Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled

Port.

Designated Root Root bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base

MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost Path cost offered to the LAN by the designated port.

Designated Bridge Bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using

the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port Port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the

LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the

port.

Topology Change Acknowledge Identifies whether the topology change acknowledgement flag is set for the

next BPDU to be transmitted for this port. It is either True or False.

Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. It is either Enabled

or Disabled.

Point-to-point MAC Derived value of the point-to-point status.

CST Regional Root Bridge identifier of the CST regional root. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual209

View the Rapid STP information

You can view information about the Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) port status.

To view information about RSTP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > RSTP.

The the Rapid STP page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

CST Path Cost Path cost to the CST regional root.

Port Forwarding State The forwarding state of this port.

Table 38. CST port status (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual210

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

The following table describes the Rapid STP status information displayed on the page.

Table 39. Rapid STP status information

Field Description

Interface The physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.

Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning tree. The port

role is one of the following: Root Port, Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master

Port, or Disabled Port.

Mode Specifies the spanning tree operation mode. Different modes are STP

, RSTP, and MSTP

Fast Link Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port.

Status The forwarding state of this port.

Manage the MST settings

You can configure a multiple spanning tree (MST) on the switch.

Configure an MST instance

To configure an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual211

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

7. Configure the MST values:

• MST ID. Specify the ID of the MST to create. The valid values for this are 1 to 4094.

This is visible only when the select option of the MST ID select box is selected.

•Priority. The bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are running

STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest

priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096. If you

specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to the

next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if you set the priority to any

value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the value to 0. The default

value is 32768. The valid range is 0–61440.

• VLAN Id. The menu includes all VLANs that are configured on the switch. You can

select VLANs that must be associated with the MST instance or clear VLANs that are

already associated with the MST instance.

8. Click the Add button.

The MST is added.

For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the

page.

Table 40. MST configuration

Field Description

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the

bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Last TCN The time in day:hour:minute:second format since the topology of the

selected MST instance last changed.

Topology Change Count Number of times that the topology changed for the selected MST instance.

Topology Change The value of the topology change setting for the switch indicating if a

topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected MST

instance. It is either True or False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority

and the base MAC address of the bridge

Root Path Cost Path cost to the designated root for this MST instance.

Root Port Port to access the designated root for this MST instance.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual212

Modify an MST instance

To modify an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the instance.

You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports.

8. Update the values.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an MST instance

To delete an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual213

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box for the instance.

8. Click the Delete button.

The MST instance is removed.

Configure and view the port settings for an MST instance

You can configure and display the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) settings on a specific port

on the switch.

A port can become diagnostically disabled (D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe

error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU

flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a

3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.

To configure and view the port settings for an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual214

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Port Configuration.

The MST Port Configuration page displays.

Note: If no MST instances were configured on the switch, the page displays

a “No MSTs Available” message.

7. From the Select MST menu, select an MST instance.

8. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

9. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual215

10. Configure the MST values for the selected interfaces:

• Port Priority. The priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance. The

port priority is set in multiples of 16. If you specify a value that is not a multiple of 16,

the priority is set to the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a

multiple of 16. For example, if you set a value between 0 and 15, the priority is set to

0. If you specify a number between 16 and 31, the priority is set to 16. Specify a value

in the range of 0–240.

• Port Path Cost. Set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected

MST instance. Specify a value in the range of 0–200000000.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the read-only MST port configuration information displayed on

the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page.

Table 41. MST port status information

Field Description

Auto-calculated Port Path

Cost

Indicates whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or not

(Disabled). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the

configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It is

made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Port Up Time Since Counters

Last Cleared

The time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in days, hours,

minutes, and seconds.

Port Mode The Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode that is associated with the port

or port channel. The possible values are Enable and Disable.

Port Forwarding State Indicates the current STP state of a port. If enabled, the port state determines

what forwarding action is taken on traffic. Possible port states are as follows:

• Manual Forwarding. STP is currently disabled on the port. The port

forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses.

• Discarding. The port is currently blocked. The port cannot forward traffic

nor can it learn MAC addresses.

• Learning. The port is currently in the learning mode. The port cannot

forward traffic. However, it can learn new MAC addresses.

• Forwarding. The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The port can

forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning

tree. The port role is one of the following: Root Port, Designated Port, Alternate

Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled Port.

Designated Root The root bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost The cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are

less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual216

View the STP Statistics

You can view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs)

transmitted and received on each port.

To view the spanning tree statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Statistics.

Designated Bridge The bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using

the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port The port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the

LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Table 41. MST port status information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual217

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the information available about the STP Statistics page.

Table 42. STP Statistics

Field Description

Interface Selects one of the physical or port channel interfaces of the switch.

STP BPDUs Received Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port.

STP BPDUs Transmitted Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Received Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

MSTP BPDUs Received Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

Configure multicast

Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups for IPv4 multicast are

identified by class D addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Host

groups for IPv6 multicast are identified by the prefix ff00::/8.

View, search, or clear the MFDB table

The Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) holds the port membership information for all

active multicast address entries. The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC

address pair. Entries can contain data for more than one protocol.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual218

To view, search, or clear the MFDB table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Table.

7. In the Search by MAC Address field, enter a MAC address.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

8. Click the Go button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual219

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

Table 43. MFDB table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which you requested data.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.

Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user.

Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

Component The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database.

Possible values are IGMP snooping, GMRP

, Static Filtering and MLD snooping.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are Management

Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Forwarding Interfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the forwarding interfaces and

removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces.

View the MFDB statistics

To view the MFDB statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual220

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Statistics.

The following table describes the MFDB Statistics fields.

Table 44. MFDB Statistics information

Field Description

Max MFDB Table Entries The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding Database

table can hold.

Most MFDB Entries Since Last

Reset

The largest number of entries that were present in the Multicast Forwarding

Database table since last reset. This value is also known as the MFDB

high-water mark.

Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.

Configure the auto-video multicast settings

You can configure the auto-video settings.

To configure auto-video multicast settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual221

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > Auto-Video.

The Auto-Video Configuration page displays.

7. Select one of the following radio buttons:

•Select the Disable radio button to globally disable Auto-Video administrative mode

for the switch.

•Select the Enable radio button to globally enable Auto-Video administrative mode for

the switch.

The Auto-Video VLAN field shows the number of autoconfigured IGMP snooping VLANs.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage IGMP snooping

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is a feature that allows a switch to

forward IPv4 multicast traffic intelligently. Multicast IPv4 traffic is traffic that is destined to a

host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0

to 239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards

traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from

broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.

A traditional Ethernet network can be separated into different network segments to prevent

placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these

segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the

switch forwards a copy to each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the

IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes

connected to the network.

This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be detected or

processed by all connected nodes. For multicast packets, this approach could lead to a less

efficient use of the network bandwidth, particularly when the packets are intended for a small

number of nodes only. Packets are flooded into network segments where no node is

receptive to the packet. Although nodes rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets

addressed to unrequested group addresses, the nodes cannot transmit new packets onto the

shared media while the multicast packets are being flooded. Such as waste of bandwidth is

even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for example in full-duplex links.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual222

Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets can solve this problem. While the IGMP packets

are being forwarded throughout the network, the switch uses the information in the packets to

determine which segments must receive packets that are directed to the group address.

Configure IGMP snooping

You can configure the settings for IGMP snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for

multicast traffic.

To configure IGMP snooping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual223

7. Select the IGMP Snooping Status Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies the administrative mode for IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

8. Select the Validate IGMP IP header Enable or Disable radio button.

When IGMP IP header validation is enabled, any IGMP IP header must include the

Router Alert, ToS, and TTL information. Otherwise, the IGMP packet is discarded. The

default value is Enable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

10. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics

on the page.

Table 45. IGMP Snooping Configuration information

Field Description

Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU.

Interfaces Enabled for IGMP

Snooping

The interfaces that are enabled for IGMP snooping.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping

The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping Querier

The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping querier.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual224

Configure IGMP snooping for interfaces

To configure IGMP snooping for interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Interface

Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual225

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select Disable or Enable.

This specifies the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP snooping for the

switch. The default is Disable.

10. In the Host Timeout field, specify the time that the switch must wait for a report for a

particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.

11. In the Max Response Time field, specify the time that the switch must wait after sending a

query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that

interface.

Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in

seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group

membership interval.

12. In the MRouter Timeout field, specify the time that the switch must wait to receive a query

on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero

indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.

13. From the Fast Leave Mode menu, select whether fast leave mode is enabled.

The option are Enable and Disable. The default is Disable.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View, search, or clear the IGMP snooping table

You can view and clear all entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database that were created for

IGMP snooping.

To view, search, or clear the IGMP snooping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual226

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Table.

The IGMP Snooping Table page displays.

7. In the Search By MAC Address field, specify the MAC address whose MFDB table entry

you want to view.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

8. Click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

The following table describes the information in the IGMP snooping table.

Table 46. IGMP Snooping Table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding and/or filtering

information. The format is six two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated

by colons, for example, 01:00:5e:45:67:89.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID for which the switch holds forwarding and filtering information.

Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end

user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or

protocol.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual227

Configure IGMP snooping for VLANs

To configure IGMP snooping for VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are

Management Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Interface The interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd) and filtering (Flt) for the

associated address.

Table 46. IGMP Snooping Table information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual228

7. To enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN, in the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

8. Configure the IGMP snooping values:

• Admin Mode. Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The

default is Disable.

•Fast Leave Mode. Enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave mode for the

specified VLAN ID. The default is Disable.

• Host Timeout. Set the value for group membership interval of IGMP snooping for the

specified VLAN ID. The valid range is Maximum Response Time + 1 to 3600 seconds.

• Maximum Response Time. Set the value for the maximum response time of IGMP

snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is from 1 to 25 seconds. The

configured value must be lower than the value that you specify in the Host Timeout

field.

• MRouter Timeout. Set the value for multicast router expiry time of IGMP snooping for

the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds.

• Report Suppression Mode. Enable or disable IGMP snooping report suppression

mode for the specified VLAN ID. IGMP snooping report suppression allows the

suppression of the IGMP reports sent by the multicast hosts by building a Layer 3

membership table. The results is that only the most essential reports are sent to the

IGMP routers so that the routers can continue to receive the multicast traffic.The

default is Disable.

• Querier Mode. Enable or disable the IGMP querier mode for the specified VLAN ID. If

proxy querier mode is disabled, an IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not

sent in response to an IGMP leave packet. The default is Disable.

• Query Interval. Set the IGMP query interval for the specified VLAN ID. The valid

range is 1 to 1800 seconds. The default is 60 seconds.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual229

Modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN

To modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

8. Update the values.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual230

Disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN and remove it from the

table

To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN and remove it from the table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

8. Click the Delete button.

Snooping is disabled on the VLAN and the VLAN is removed from the table.

Configure one or more IGMP multicast router interfaces

You can configure an interface as the designated interface to which a multicast router is

attached. All IGMP packets snooped by the switch are forwarded to the multicast router

reachable from this interface. Configuring a multicast router interface is usually not required

because the switch automatically detects the multicast router and forwards IGMP packets

accordingly. It is required only if you want to make sure that the multicast router always

receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual231

To configure one or more IGMP multicast router interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual232

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. In the Multicast Router field, select Enable or Disable.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an IGMP multicast router VLAN

You can configure an interface to forward only snooped IGMP packets from a specific VLAN

to the multicast router attached to the interface. This configuration is usually not required

because the switch automatically detects a multicast router and forwards the IGMP packets

accordingly. It is required only if you want to make sure that the multicast router always

receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.

To configure a multicast router VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual233

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN

Configuration.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

8. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

9. From the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

IGMP snooping querier overview

IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end-devices

on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP

querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with

the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not

receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it stops forwarding multicasts to

the port where the end device is located.

You can configure and display information about IGMP snooping queriers on the network

and, separately, on VLANs.

Configure an IGMP snooping querier

You can configure the settings for an IGMP snooping querier.

To configure the settings for an IGMP snooping querier:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual234

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier Configuration.

7. Configure the following settings:

• Querier Admin Mode. Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

• Snooping Querier IP Address. Enter the snooping querier IP address to be used as

the source address in periodic IGMP queries. This address is used when no address

is configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent.

• IGMP Version. Specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.

The range is 1 to 2. The default value is 2.

• Query Interval(secs). Specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries

sent by the snooping querier. The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 and

1800. The default value is 60.

• Querier Expiry Interval(secs). Specify the time interval in seconds after which the

last querier information is removed. The querier expiry Interval must be a value in the

range of 60 and 300. The default value is 125.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual235

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an IGMP snooping querier for VLANs

You can configure IGMP queriers for use with VLANs on the network.

To configure IGMP snooping for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Configuration.

7. From the VLAN ID menu, select New Entry.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual236

8. Configure the following settings:

• VLAN ID. The VLAN ID for which the IGMP snooping querier is to be enabled.

• Querier Election Participate Mode. Enable or disable querier this mode:

- Disable. Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the

snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.

- Enable. The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the lowest

IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

• Snooping Querier VLAN Address. Specify the snooping querier IP address to be

used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Display the status of the IGMP snooping querier for VLANs

To display the status of the IGMP snooping querier VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Status.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual237

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 47. Querier VLAN Status information

Field Description

VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which IGMP snooping querier is administratively enabled

and the VLAN exists in the VLAN database.

Operational State The operational state of the IGMP snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in

any of the following states:

Operational Version The operational IGMP protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the

VLAN.

Last Querier Version The IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was

snooped on the VLAN.

Operational Max Response Time The maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the

snooping querier.

Manage MLD snooping

In IPv6 networks, Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping performs a similar function as

IGMP does in IPv4 networks. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is selectively

forwarded to ports that are configured to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all ports

in a VLAN. The ports are determined by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.

A multicast listener is a device that is configured to receive IPv6 multicast packets. MLD is

used by IPv6 multicast routers to discover the presence of multicast listeners on its

directly-attached links and to discover which multicast packets are of interest to neighboring

devices.

• Querier. The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping

switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the

configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch finds a better

querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier. The snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN.

If the querier expiry interval timer expires, the snooping switch moves

into querier mode.

• Disabled. The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The

snooping querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP snooping is not

operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured

or the network management address is also not configured.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual238

The MLD protocol is derived from IGMP. MLD version 1 (MLDv1) is equivalent to IGMPv2,

and MLD version 2 (MLDv2) is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD is a subprotocol of Internet

Control Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6), and MLD messages are a subset of ICMPv6

messages, identified in IPv6 packets by a preceding Next Header value of 58.

Enable MLD snooping

You can enable MLD snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic.

To enable MLD snooping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual239

7. Select the MLD Snooping Admin Mode Enable radio button.

By default, the Disable radio button is selected.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable MLD Snooping Configuration fields.

Table 48. MLD Snooping Configuration information

Field Definition

Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that were processed by the CPU.

Interfaces Enabled for MLD

Snooping

The interfaces on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled. MLD

snooping must be enabled globally and on an interface for the interface to

be able to snoop MLD packets to determine which segments must receive

multicast packets directed to the group address.

VLAN IDs Enabled For MLD

Snooping

The VLANs on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled.

Configure MLD snooping for interfaces

To configure MLD snooping for interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual240

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Interface Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the interface mode for the

selected interface for MLD snooping for the switch.

The default is Disable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual241

10. In the Membership Interval field, specify the time that the switch must wait for a report for

a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

The valid range is from 2 to 3600 seconds. The configured value must be greater than the

maximum response time. The default is 260 seconds.

11. In the Max Response Time in seconds field, specify the time that the switch must wait

after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular

group on that interface.

Enter a value greater than or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in

seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group

membership interval.

12. In the Expiration Time field, specify the time that the switch must wait to receive a query on

an interface before removing the interface from the list of interfaces with multicast routers

attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero

indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.

13. From the Fast Leave menu, select to enable or disable Fast Leave on the interface.

If Fast Leave is enabled, the interface can be immediately removed from the Layer 2

forwarding table when the switch receives an MLD leave message for a multicast group

without first sending MAC-based general queries. The default is Disable.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the MLD VLAN settings

To configure the MLD VLAN settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual242

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN IDs for which MLD snooping is enabled.

8. From the Fast Leave menu, select to enable or disable the MLD snooping Fast Leave mode

for the specified VLAN ID.

9. In the Membership Interval field, set the value for the group membership interval of MLD

snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is Maximum Response Time + 1 to 3600.

10. In the Maximum Response Time field, set the value for the maximum response time of

MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 1 to Group Membership Interval –1. This value must be less than the

group membership interval value.

11. In the Multicast Router Expiry Time field, set the value for the multicast router expiry time

of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 0 to 3600.

12. Click the Add button.

MLD snooping is enabled on the specified VLAN.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual243

Modify the MLD snooping settings for a VLAN

To the modify MLD snooping settings for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

8. Change the settings.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove MLD snooping from a VLAN

To remove MLD snooping from a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual244

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

The MLD VLAN Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

8. Click the Delete button.

MLD snooping is removed from the VLAN.

Configure one or more MLD multicast router interfaces

To configure one or more MLD multicast router interfaces:

Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

9. Launch a web browser.

10. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual245

11. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

12. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

13. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration.

14. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

15. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

16. From the Multicast Router menu, select to enable or disable the multicast router for the

selected interfaces.

17. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual246

Configure an MLD multicast router VLAN

To configure an MLD multicast router VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN Configuration.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want the multicast router to be

enabled.

8. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID.

9. From the Multicast Router menu, select to enable or disable the multicast router for the

VLAN ID.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual247

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an MLD snooping querier

You can configure the settings for an MLD snooping querier.

To configure an MLD snooping querier:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual248

7. Configure the following settings:

• Querier Admin Mode. Enable or disable MLD snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

• Querier Address. Enter an IP address. This specifies the snooping querier address

to be used as the source address in periodic MLD queries. This address is used when

no address is configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent. The supported

IPv6 formats are x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x and x::x.

• MLD Version. Specify the MLD protocol version used in periodic MLD queries.

• Query Interval(secs). Specify the interval in seconds between periodic queries sent

by the snooping querier. The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 to 1800.

The default value is 60.

• Querier Expiry Interval(secs). Specify the interval in seconds after which the last

querier information is removed. The querier expiry interval must be a value in the

range of 60 to 300. The default value is 60.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The page displays VLAN IDs enabled for the MLD snooping querier.

Configure the MLD snooping querier VLAN settings

To configure the MLD snooping querier VLAN settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual249

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID on which the MLD snooping querier is

administratively enabled and for which a VLAN exists in the VLAN database.

8. From the Querier Election Participate Mode menu, select to enable or disable the querier

participation election mode for MLD snooping.

When this mode is disabled, on detecting another querier of same version in the VLAN,

the snooping querier moves to a non-querier state. When this mode is enabled, the

snooping querier participates in querier election where the lowest IP address wins the

querier election and operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

9. In the Querier VLAN Address field, specify the snooping querier address to be used as the

source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual250

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 49. MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration information

Field Description

Operational State The operational state of the MLD snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the

following states:

Operational Version The operational MLD protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.

Last Querier Version The MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the

VLAN.

Operational Max

Response Time

The maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the snooping

querier.

Configure multicast VLAN registration

IGMP snooping helps limit multicast traffic when member ports are in the same VLAN.

However, when ports belong to different VLANs, a copy of the multicast stream is sent to

each VLAN with member ports in the multicast group. Multicast VLAN registration (MVR)

eliminates the need to duplicate the multicast traffic when multicast group member ports

belong to different VLANs.

MVR uses a dedicated multicast VLAN to forward multicast traffic over the L2 network. Only

one multicast source VLAN (MVLAN can be configured per switch, and it is used only for

certain multicast traffic, such as traffic from an IPTV application, to avoid duplication of

multicast streams for clients in different VLANs. Clients can dynamically join or leave the

multicast VLAN without interfering with their membership in other VLANs.

MVR, like IGMP snooping, allows a Layer 2 switch to listen to IGMP messages to learn about

multicast group membership.

You can configure basic, advanced, group, interface, or group membership settings.

• Querier. Snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch sends

out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query

interval. If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to

non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier. Snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN. If the querier

expiry interval timer is expired, the snooping switch moves into querier mode.

• Disabled. Snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping querier

moves to disabled mode when MLD snooping is not operational on the VLAN or

when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is

also not configured.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual251

Configure the global MVR settings

To configure the global MVR settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Basic > MVR Configuration.

7. From the MVR Running menu, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Disable.

8. In the MVR Multicast Vlan field, specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is

received.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual252

All source ports belong to this VLAN. The value can be set in a range of 1 to 4093. The

default value is 1.

9. In the MVR Global Query Response Time field, set the maximum time that the switch must

wait for an IGMP group membership report before removing the port from the multicast

group membership.

This time applies only to receiver-port leave processing. When an IGMP query is sent

from a receiver port, the switch waits for the default or configured MVR query time for an

IGMP group membership report before removing the port from the multicast group

membership. The value is equal to tenths of a second. The range is from 1 to 100 tenths.

The default is 5 tenths or one-half.

10. From the MVR Mode menu, specify the MVR mode of operation.

The options are compatible and dynamic. The default is compatible.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

12. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 50. MVR Configuration information

Field Definition

MVR Max Multicast Groups The maximum number of multicast groups that MVR supports.

MVR Current Multicast Groups The number of MVR groups allocated.

Configure an MVR group

To configure an MVR group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual253

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Configuration.

7. In the MVR Group IP field, specify the IP address for the new MVR group.

8. In the Count field, specify the number of contiguous MVR groups.

This number helps you to create multiple MVR groups through a single click of the Add

button. If the field is empty, then clicking the button creates only one new group. The field

is displayed as empty for each particular group. The range is from 1 to 256.

9. Click the Add button.

The MVR group is added.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 51. MVR Group Configuration

Field Definition

Status The status of the specific MVR group.

Members The list of ports that participate in the specific MVR group.

Configure MVR group membership

To configure MVR group membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual254

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Membership.

7. From the Group IP menu, select the IP multicast address of the MVR group.

8. In the Ports table, click each port that you want to make a member of the MVR group.

A selected port is shown by a check mark.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual255

Configure the MVR interface settings

To configure the MVR interface setting:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Interface Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual256

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, specify whether MVR is enabled by selecting Enable or

Disable.

The default is Disable.

10. From the Type menu, specify whether the port is an MVR receiver or an MVR source by

selecting receiver or a source.

The default port type is none.

11. From the Immediate Leave menu, specify whether the Immediate Leave feature is enabled

by selecting Enable or Disable.

The default is Disable.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

13. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

View the MVR statistics

To view the MVR statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual257

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Statistics.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 52. MVR Statistics information

Field Definition

IGMP Query Received The number of received IGMP queries.

IGMP Report V1 Received The number of received IGMP V1 reports.

IGMP Report V2 Received The number of received IGMP V2 reports.

IGMP Leave Received The number of received IGMP leaves.

IGMP Query Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP queries.

IGMP Report V1 Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP V1 reports.

IGMP Report V2 Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP V2 reports.

IGMP Leave Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP leaves.

IGMP Packet Receive Failures The number of IGMP packet receive failures.

IGMP Packet Transmit Failures The number of IGMP packet transmit failures.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual258

View, search, and manage the MAC

address table

You can view or configure the MAC address table. This table contains information about

unicast entries for which the switch holds forwarding or filtering information. This information

lets the transparent bridging function determine how an incoming frame must be propagated.

If you clear the MAC address entries in the MAC address table, only the dynamic entries are

removed.

View, search, or clear the MAC address table

To view, search, or clear the MAC address table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Address Table > Basic > Address Table.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual259

7. Use the Search menu and field to search for a MAC address, VLAN ID, or interface

number:

• Search by MAC Address. From the Search menu, select MAC Address, and enter

the 6-byte hexadecimal MAC address in two-digit groups separated by colons, for

example, 01:23:45:67:89:AB. Then click the Go button.

If the address exists, that entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the

remaining (higher) MAC addresses. An exact match is required.

• Search VLAN ID. From the Search menu, select VLAN ID, and enter the VLAN ID,

for example, 100. Then click the Go button.

• Search Interface. From the Search menu, select Interface, and enter the interface ID

using the respective interface naming convention (for example, g1 or l1). Then click the

Go button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 53. MAC Address Table information

Field Description

Total MAC Address The number of total MAC addresses learned or configured.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding and/or filtering

information. The format is a 6-byte MAC address that is separated by colons, for

example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.

Interface The interface upon which this address was learned.

Status The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are as follows:

• Static. The value of the corresponding instance was added by the system or a user

and cannot be relearned.

• Learned. The value of the corresponding instance was learned, and is being used.

• Management. The value of the corresponding instance is also the value of an

existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual260

Set the dynamic address aging interval

You can set the address aging interval for the forwarding database. This is the time-out

period in seconds for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.

To set the dynamic address aging interval:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Dynamic Addresses.

7. In the Address Aging Timeout (seconds) field, specify the time-out period in seconds for

aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.

802.1D-1990 recommends a default of 300 seconds. The value can be any number

between 10 and 1000000 seconds. The default is 300.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual261

Add a static MAC address to the MAC address table

To add a static MAC address to the MAC address table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Static MAC Address.

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

8. In the Static MAC Address field, enter the MAC address.

9. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID that must be associated with the MAC

address.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual262

10. Click the Add button.

The static MAC address is added to the switch.

Configure Layer 2 loop protection

Loops inside a network are costly because they consume resources and reduce the

performance of the network. Detecting loops manually can be cumbersome.

The switch can automatically identify loops in the network. You can enable loop protection

per port or globally.

If loop protection is enabled, the switch sends predefined PDU packets to a Layer 2

broadcast destination address (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF) on all ports for which the feature is

enabled. You can selectively disable PDU packet transmission for loop protection on specific

ports even while port loop protection is enabled. If the switch receives a packet with the

previously mentioned broadcast destination address, the source MAC address in the packet

is compared with the MAC address of the switch. If the MAC address does not match, the

packet is forwarded to all ports that are members of the same VLAN, just like any other

broadcast packet. The packet is not forwarded to the port from which it was received.

If the source MAC address matches the MAC address of the switch, the switch can perform

one of the following actions, depending on how you configure the action:

•The port is shut down.

•A log message is generated. (If a syslog server is configured, the log message can be

sent to the syslog server.)

•The port is shut down and a log message is generated.

Loop protection is not intended for ports that serve as uplinks between spanning tree–aware

switches. It is intended for unmanaged switches that drop spanning tree BPDUs. Loop

protection detects physical and logical loops between Ethernet ports on a device. You must

enable loop protection globally before you can enable and configure it at the interface level.

Loop protection is supported on physical interfaces and static LAG interfaces, but not on

dynamic LAG interfaces.

Configure global Layer 2 loop protection

To configure L2 loop protection globally:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual263

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

7. To enable or disable loop protection feature, select the Admin Mode Enable or Disable

radio button.

By default, the Disable radio button is selected.

8. From the Transmit Interval menu, select the time in seconds between transmission of loop

packets.

The default transmit interval is 5 seconds.

9. From the Max PDU Receive menu, select the maximum number of packets to be received

before an action is taken.

The default is 1.

10. In the Disable Timer field, enter the time in seconds after which a port is disabled when a

loop is detected.

The range is from 0 to 604800 seconds. The default is 0 seconds.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual264

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View and configure Layer 2 loop protection on a port

To view and configure L2 loop protection on a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Switching User Manual265

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Keep Alive menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether keep-alives are

enabled on an interface.

The default is Disable.

10. From the RX Action menu, select the action that occurs when the switch detects a loop on

an interface:

• Log. The switch logs a message.

• Disable. The switch disables the interface. This is the default action.

• Both. The switch both logs a message and disables the interface.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

12. Click the Clear button to clear all the statistics in the table.

13. Click the Refresh button to refresh the page with the latest information about the switch.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 54. L2 Loop Protection Interface Information

Field Description

Loop Detected Shows whether a loop is detected on the interface. If the interface is

disabled and then reenabled, the status changes to No again.

Loop Count The number of packets that were received after the loop was detected.

Time Since Last Loop The time that elapsed since the loop was detected.

Port Status The status of the interface (Enabled, Disabled, or D-Disabled, which stands

for diagnostically disabled).

266

4Configure Routing

This chapter contains the following sections.

•Routing concepts

•Configure the routing mode

•Configure IPv6 routing

•Configure VLAN routing

•Configure router discovery for a VLAN routing interface

•Manage routes and view the routing table

•Configure Address Resolution Protocol

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual267

Routing concepts

The switch supports IP routing. When a packet enters the switch, the switch checks the

destination MAC address to determine if it matches any of the configured routing interfaces.

If it does, the switch searches the host table for a matching destination IP address. If a

matching entry is found, the packet is routed to the host. If no matching entry is found, the

switch performs a longest prefix match on the destination IP address. If a matching entry is

found, the packet is routed to the next hop. If no matching entry is found, the packet is routed

to the next hop that is specified in the default route. If no default route exists, the packet is are

dropped.

The routing table can include static entries that you added manually. The host table can

include static entries that were manually added and entries that were dynamically added

through ARP.

Configure the routing mode

For information about how to configure the routing mode and display IP routing data, see the

following sections:

•Configure the router settings on page 267

•View the IP routing statistics on page 269

Configure the router settings

You can enable routing and configure the routing settings for the switch.

The switch allows routing through any of its interfaces only after you enable routing on the

switch. Separately, you can enable routing on VLANs (see Configure VLAN routing on

page 290).

To enable routing on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual268

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing > IP > IP Configuration.

7. Select the Routing Mode Enable radio button.

You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the interfaces.

Routing is also enabled or disabled per VLAN interface. The default value is Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the IP configuration information displayed on the page.

Table 55. Global IP status information

Field Description

Default Time to Live The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of

datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by the

transport layer protocol. The default value is 64.

Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. This is a compile-time

constant. The default value is 1.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual269

View the IP routing statistics

You can view the IP routing statistics as specified in RFC 1213.

To view the IP routing statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IP > Statistics.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual270

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 56. IP Statistics information

Field Description

IpInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including

those received in error.

IpInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers,

including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors,

time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and

so on.

IpInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their

IP header’s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this

entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and

addresses of unsupported classes (Class E). For entities that are not IP

gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes

datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local

address.

IpForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP

destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to

forward them to that final destination. In entities that do not act as IP

gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed

through this entity, and the source-route option processing was successful.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual271

IpInUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

IpInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered

to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded (for lack of

buffer space). This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while

awaiting re-assembly.

IpInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user

protocols (including ICMP).

IpOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not

include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.

IpOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered

to prevent their transmission to their destination, but that were discarded for

reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter would include

datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this

(discretionary) discard criterion.

IpOutNoRoutes The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to

transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any packets

counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion. This includes

any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its default gateways

are down.

IpReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds for which received fragments are held

while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.

IpReasmReqds The number of IP fragments received that were reassembled at this entity.

IpReasmOKs The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

IpReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for

whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a

count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the

number of fragments by combining them as they are received.

IpFragOKs The number of IP datagrams that were fragmented at this entity.

IpFragFails The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to

be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for reasons such as their Don't

Fragment flag was set.

IpFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of

fragmentation at this entity.

IcmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This counter

includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.

IcmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined as

having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).

IcmpInDestUnreachs The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages received.

Table 56. IP Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual272

IcmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP time exceeded messages received.

IcmpInParmProbs The number of ICMP parameter problem messages received.

IcmpInSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP source quench messages received.

IcmpInRedirects The number of ICMP redirect messages received.

IcmpInEchos The number of ICMP echo (request) messages received.

IcmpInEchoReps The number of ICMP echo reply messages received.

IcmpInTimestamps The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages received.

IcmpInTimestampReps The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages received.

IcmpInAddrMasks The number of ICMP address mask request messages received.

IcmpInAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP address mask reply messages received.

IcmpOutMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send. This

counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.

IcmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send due to

problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does

not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of

IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be

no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.

IcmpOutDestUnreachs The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages sent.

IcmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP time exceeded messages sent.

IcmpOutParmProbs The number of ICMP parameter problem messages sent.

IcmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP source quench messages sent.

IcmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP redirect messages sent. For a host, this is always

zero, since hosts do not send redirects.

IcmpOutEchos The number of ICMP echo (request) messages sent.

IcmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP echo reply messages sent.

IcmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages.

IcmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages sent.

IcmpOutAddrMasks The number of ICMP address mask request messages sent.

Table 56. IP Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual273

Configure IPv6 routing

Note: IPv6 is supported on VLAN interfaces only, not on physical ports.

Configure the global IPv6 routing settings

You can configure the global IPv6 routing settings for the switch.

To enable IPv6 routing on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Global Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual274

7. Next to IPv6 Unicast Routing, specify whether IPv6 unicast routing is globally enabled by

selecting the Enable radio button or the Disable radio button.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the IPv6 route table

To view the IPv6 route table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Basic > Route Table.

7. From the Routes Displayed menu, select one of the following options:

• All Routes. Show all active IPv6 routes.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual275

• Best Routes Only. Show only the best active routes.

• Configured Routes Only. Show only the manually configured routes.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 57. IPv6 Route Table information

Field Description

Number of Routes The total number of active routes in the route table.

IPv6 Prefix The network prefix for the active route.

Prefix Length The prefix length for the active route.

Protocol The type of protocol for the active route.

Next Hop Interface The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next

hop would be a Null0 interface.

Next Hop IP Address The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.

Preference The route preference of the configured route.

Configure the IPv6 VLAN interface settings

To configure the IPv6 VLAN interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual276

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the IPv6 Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

When IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global

address. In this case, an EUI-64-based link-local address is used. The default value is

Disable.

9. From the DHCPv6 Client Mode menu, select to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client mode

on an interface.

Only one interface can function as a client. The default value is Disable.

10. From the Stateless Address AutoConfig Mode menu, select to enable or disable the

stateless address autoconfiguration mode on an interface.

The default value is Disable.

11. From the Admin Mode menu, select to enable or disable the IPv6 mode.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual277

The default is Disable. When the IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6

operation without a global address. In this case, an EUI-64-based link-local address is

used.

12. In the Duplicate Address Detection Transmits field, specify the number of duplicate

address detection (DAD) transmits on an interface.

The DAD transmits value must be in the range 0 to 600. The default is 1.

13. In the Life Time Interval field, specify the router advertisement life time interval that is sent

from the interface.

This value must be greater than or equal to the maximum advertisement interval.

0 means do not use the router as the default router. The range of router life time is 0 to

9000. The default is 1800.

14. In the Adv NS Interval field, specify the retransmission time field of router advertisements

sent from the interface.

A value of 0 means the interval is not specified for the router. The range of the neighbor

solicit interval is 1000 to 4294967295. The default is 0.

15. In the Adv Reachable Interval field, specify the router advertisement time.

This is the time allocated to consider the neighbors reachable after ND confirmation. The

range of reachable time is 0 to 3600000. The default is 0.

16. In the Adv Interval field, specify the maximum time allowed between sending router

advertisements from the interface.

The range of the maximum advertisement interval is 4 to 1800. The default value is 600.

17. From the Adv Managed Config Flag menu, specify the setting for the router advertisement

managed address configuration flag.

When the selection is Enable, end nodes use DHCPv6. When the selection is Disable,

end nodes autoconfigure addresses. The default value is Disable.

18. From the Adv Other Config Flag menu, select to enable or disable the router

advertisement other stateful configuration flag.

The default value is Disable.

19. From the Router Preference menu, specify the router preference advertisement on an

interface.

The default value is Medium.

20. From the Adv Suppress Flag menu, select to enable or disable the router advertisement

suppression on an interface.

The default value is Disable.

21. From the Destination Unreachables menu, select to enable or disable the mode for

sending ICMPv6 destination unreachable messages on this interface.

If this mode is disabled, the interface does not send ICMPv6 destination unreachable

messages. By default, the IPv6 destination unreachables mode is enabled.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual278

22. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 58. IPv6 VLAN Configuration information

Field Description

Routing Mode The routing mode of an interface. The default is Disable.

Operational Mode The operational state of an interface. The default value is Disable.

Link State Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Configure an IPv6 prefix

To configure an IPv6 prefix:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual279

7. From the Interface menu, select the interface to be configured.

When the selection is changed, the page refreshes, causing all fields to be updated for

the newly selected interface.

8. In the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 prefix for an interface.

9. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for an interface.

10. From the EUI64 menu, select Enable or Disable to indicate whether the specified 64-bit

unicast prefix is enabled.

11. In the Valid Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

This is the time allowed to consider the prefix valid for the purpose of on-link

determination. The valid life time is 0 to 4294967295.

12. In the Preferred Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.

An autoconfigured address generated from this prefix is preferred. The preferred life time

must be in the range 0 to 4294967295.

13. From the Onlink Flag menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the selected

prefix can be used for on-link determination.

The default is Enable.

14. From the Autonomous Flag menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the

selected prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration.

The default value is Enable.

The Current State field displays the state of the IPV6 address. The state is TENT if

routing is disabled or DAD fails. The state is Active if the interface is active and DAD is

successful.

15. Click the Add button.

The IPv6 address is added to the interface.

16. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual280

View the IPv6 routing statistics

To view the IPv6 routing statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Statistics.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual281

The previous figure shows the top of the page only.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable IPv6 data that is displayed.

Table 59. IPv6 Statistics information

Field Description

Ip6InReceives The total number of input datagrams received, including those received in

error.

Ip6InHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6

headers, including version number mismatch, other format errors, hop count

exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IPv6 options, and so on.

Ip6InTooBigErrors The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their

size exceeded the link MTU of the outgoing interface.

Ip6InNoRoutes The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be found

to transmit them to their destination.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual282

Ip6InAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in their

IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this

entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, ::0) and

unsupported addresses (such as addresses with unallocated prefixes). For

entities that are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams,

this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address

was not a local address.

Ip6InUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This counter is

incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed,

which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.

Ip6InTruncatedPkts The number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame did not

carry enough data.

Ip6InDiscards The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were

encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded

for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does not include any

datagrams discarded while awaiting reassembly.

Ip6InDelivers The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 user-protocols

(including ICMP). This counter is incremented at the interface to which

these datagrams were addressed, which might not be the input interface for

some of the datagrams.

Ip6OutForwDatagrams The number of output datagrams that this entity received and forwarded to

their final destinations. In entities that do not act as IPv6 routers, this

counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this

entity, and the source-route processing was successful. For a successfully

forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented.

Ip6OutRequests The number of IPv6 datagrams that local IPv6 user protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IPv6 in requests for transmission. This counter does not

include any datagrams that are also included in

ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams.

Ip6OutDiscards The number of output IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were

encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded

for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter can include

datagrams that are also counted in ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams.

Ip6OutNoRoutes The number of output datagrams that were discarded because no route

could be found to transmit them to their destination.

Ip6ReasmTimeout The number of output datagrams for which a reassembly time-out occurred.

Ip6ReasmReqds The number of IPv6 fragments received that needed to be reassembled.

This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were

addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the fragments.

Table 59. IPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual283

Ip6ReasmOKs The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. This counter is

incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed,

which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the

fragments.

Ip6ReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm (for

whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a

count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably the

algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by

combining them as they are received. This counter is incremented at the

interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be the

input interface for some of the fragments.

Ip6FragOKs The number of IPv6 datagrams that were successfully fragmented.

Ip6FragFails The number of output datagrams that were discarded because they could

not be fragmented.

Ip6FragCreates The number of output datagram fragments that were generated as a result

of fragmentation.

Ip6InMcastPkts The number of multicast packets received.

Ip6OutMcastPkts The number of multicast packets transmitted.

Ip6InOctets The total number of bytes for the received input datagrams.

Ip6OutOctets The total number of bytes for the transmitted output datagrams.

Ip6InMcastOctets The number of multicast bytes received.

Ip6OutMcastOctets The number of multicast bytes transmitted.

Ip6InBcastOctets The number of broadcast bytes received.

Ip6OutBcastOctets The number of broadcast bytes transmitted.

Ip6InNoECTPkts The number of non-ECT packets received.

Ip6InECT1Pkts The number of ECT1 packets received.

Ip6InECT0Pkts The number of ECT0 packets received.

Ip6InCEPkts The number of CE packets received.

Table 59. IPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual284

The following table describes the nonconfigurable ICMPv6 data that is displayed.

Table 60. ICMPv6 Statistics information

Field Description

Icmp6InMsgs The number of ICMP messages received, which includes all those counted

by IPv6IfIcmpInErrors. This counter is incremented at the interface to which

these ICMP messages were addressed, which might not be the input

interface for the messages.

Icmp6InError The number of ICMP messages received that included ICMP-specific errors

(bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).

Icmp6OutMsgs The number of ICMP messages sent. This counter includes all those

counted by icmpOutErrors.

Icmp6OutErrors The number of ICMP messages not sent because of problems discovered

within ICMP

, such as a lack of buffers. This number does not include errors

discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the

resulting datagram.

Icmp6InCsumErrors The number of ICMP messages received that included checksum errors.

Icmp6InDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.

Icmp6InPktTooBigs The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received.

Icmp6InTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.

Icmp6InParmProblems The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.

Icmp6InEchos The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.

Icmp6InEchoReplies The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.

Icmp6InGroupMembQueries The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages received.

Icmp6InGroupMembResponses The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages received.

Icmp6InGroupMembReductions The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages received.

Icmp6InRouterSolicits The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received.

Icmp6InRouterAdvertisements The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received.

Icmp6InNeighborSolicits The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received.

Icmp6InNeighborAdvertisements The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received.

Icmp6InRedirects The number of ICMPv6 Redirect messaged received.

Icmp6InMLDv2Reports The number of ICMPv6 MLDv2 Report messages received.

Icmp6OutDestUnreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.

Icmp6OutPktTooBigs The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent.

Icmp6OutTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

Icmp6OutParmProblems The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual285

View, search, or clear the IPv6 neighbor table

To view, search, or clear the IPv6 neighbor table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

Icmp6OutEchos The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.

Icmp6OutEchoReplies The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

Icmp6OutGroupMembQueries The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent.

Icmp6OutGroupMembResponses The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent.

Icmp6OutGroupMembReductions The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent.

Icmp6OutRouterSolicits The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent.

Icmp6OutRouterAdvertisements The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent.

Icmp6OutNeighborSolicits The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent.

Icmp6OutRedirects The number of Redirect messages sent. For a host, this number is always

zero because hosts do not send Redirect messages.

Icmp6OutMLDv2Reports The number of ICMPv6 MLDv2 Report messages sent.

Icmp6InType134 The number of ICMPv6 Type 134 messages received.

Icmp6InType135 The number of ICMPv6 Type 135 messages received.

Icmp6InType136 The number of ICMPv6 Type 136 messages received.

Icmp6OutType1 The number of ICMPv6 Type 1 messages sent.

Icmp6OutType133 The number of ICMPv6 Type 133 messages sent.

Icmp6OutType135 The number of ICMPv6 Type 135 messages sent.

Icmp6OutType136 The number of ICMPv6 Type 136 messages sent.

Icmp6OutType143 The number of ICMPv6 Type 143 messages sent.

Table 60. ICMPv6 Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual286

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Neighbor Table.

7. Use the Search menu and field to search for IPv6 routes by IPv6 address or interface

number:

• Search by IPv6 address. Select IPv6 Address from the Search menu. Enter the

128-byte hexadecimal IPv6 address in four-digit groups separated by colons, for

example, 2001:231F:::1. Then click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

• Search by Interface. Select Interface from the Search menu. Enter the interface

using the respective naming convention (for example, g1 or l1). Then click the Go

button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed.

8. To clear the IPv6 neighbors on a selected interface or on all interfaces, click the Clear

button.

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 61. IPv6 Neighbor Table information

Field Description

Interface The interface whose settings are displayed in the current table row.

IPv6 Address The IPv6 address of the neighbor or interface.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual287

Configure an IPv6 static route

To configure an IPv6 static route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with an interface.

isRtr Indicates whether the neighbor is a router. If the neighbor is a router, the

value is True. If the neighbor is not a router, the value is False.

Neighbor State The state of the neighbor cache entry. Following are the states for

dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache:

• Incmp. Address resolution is being performed on the entry. A

neighbor solicitation message was sent to the solicited-node multicast

address of the target, but the corresponding neighbor advertisement

message is not yet received.

• Reach. Positive confirmation was received within the last Reachable

Time milliseconds that the forward path to the neighbor was

functioning properly. While in REACH state, the device takes no

special action as packets are sent.

• Stale. More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last

positive confirmation was received that the forward path was

functioning properly. While in STALE state, the device takes no action

until a packet is sent.

• Delay. More than Reachable Time milliseconds elapsed since the last

positive confirmation was received that the forward path was

functioning properly. A packet was sent within the last

DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds. If no reachability

confirmation is received within DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME

seconds of entering the DELAY state, send a neighbor solicitation

message and change the state to PROBE.

• Probe. Seeks a reachability confirmation by resending neighbor

solicitation messages every Retrans Timer milliseconds until a

reachability confirmation is received.

Last Updated The time since the address was confirmed to be reachable.

Table 61. IPv6 Neighbor Table information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual288

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration.

7. In the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 network prefix for the configured route.

8. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for the configured route.

9. From the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type menu, select one of the following options:

• Global. Select this option if the IPv6 address is a global IPv6 address.

• Link-Local. Select this option if the next hop IPv6 address is a link-local IPv6

address. You must specify a next hop IPv6 address in the Next Hop IPv6 Address

field.

• Static-Reject. Select this option to create a static-reject route for a destination prefix.

You do not need to specify a next hop IPv6 address.

10. If the selection from the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type menu is Global or Link-Local, enter

the next hop IPv6 address in the Next Hop IPv6 Address field.

11. If the selection from the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type menu is Link-Local, from the

Interface menu, select the interface that connects to the IPv6 next hop.

12. In the Preference field, specify the router preference.

13. Click the Add button.

The route is added.

Note: For information about viewing routes in the IPv6 route table, see View

the IPv6 route table on page 274.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual289

Configure IPv6 route preferences

You can configure the default preference for each protocol. These values are arbitrary values

in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics. Most routing protocols use a

route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol, independent of any other

protocol. The switch selects the route with the lowest preference value as the best route to a

destination. When multiple routes to a destination exist, the preference values are used to

determine the preferred route. If these preference values routes are equal, the route with the

best route metric is chosen. To avoid problems with mismatched metrics, you must configure

different preference values for each of the protocols.

To configure IPv6 route preferences:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> IPv6 > Advanced > Route Preference.

7. In the Static field, specify the static route preference value for the router.

The range is 1 to 255. The default value is 1.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual290

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. The Local field displays the local preference.

Configure VLAN routing

You can configure the switch with some ports supporting VLANs and some ports supporting

routing. You can also configure the switch to allow traffic on a VLAN to be treated as if the

VLAN were a router port.

When a port is enabled for bridging (the default setting) rather than routing, all normal bridge

processing is performed for an inbound packet, which is then associated with a VLAN. Its

MAC destination address (MAC DA) and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address

table. If routing is enabled for the VLAN, and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is that

of the internal bridge-router interface, the packet is routed. An inbound multicast packet is

forwarded to all ports in the VLAN. If a routed VLAN receives the multicast packet, the packet

is also forwarded on the internal bridge-router interface.

Because you can configure a port to belong to more than one VLAN, VLAN routing might be

enabled for all of the VLANs on the port, or for a subset. You can use VLAN routing to allow

more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet. You can also use VLAN routing if

a VLAN spans multiple physical networks, or if you require additional segmentation or

security. A port can either be a VLAN port or a router port, but not both. However, a VLAN

port can be part of a VLAN that is itself a router port.

Create a routing interface with the VLAN Static Routing

Wizard

The VLAN Static Routing Wizard lets you create a VLAN routing interface, configure the IP

address and subnet mask for the interface, and add ports, LAGs, or both to the VLAN. With

this wizard, you can do the following:

•Create a VLAN.

•Add ports to the newly created VLAN and remove selected ports from the default VLAN.

•Optionally, create a LAG, add ports to the LAG, then add the LAG to the newly created

VLAN.

•Enable tagging on selected ports if the port is in another VLAN. Disable tagging if a

selected port does not exist in another VLAN.

•Enable routing on the VLAN using the IP address and subnet mask entered.

To use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual291

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> VLAN > VLAN Routing Wizard.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID that is associated with the VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.

8. In the IP Address field, define the IP address of the VLAN interface.

9. In the Network Mask field, define the subnet mask of the VLAN interface.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual292

10. In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the port to the default settings:

• T (Tagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.

The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• U (Untagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the port is excluded from the VLAN

but can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through GVRP.

11. In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the LAG to the default settings:

• T (Tagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

tagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

•U (Untagged). Select the LAGs on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The LAGs that are selected are included in the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank, which means that the LAG is excluded from the VLAN

but can be dynamically registered (autodetected) in the VLAN through GVRP.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage a VLAN routing interface

You can add and manage an existing VLAN (see Configure VLAN settings on page 170) as

a new VLAN routing interface. You can also manage an existing VLAN routing interface that

you added with the wizard (see Create a routing interface with the VLAN Static Routing

Wizard on page 290).

To add or change a VLAN routing interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual293

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration.

7. From the VLAN menu, select the VLAN.

This menu displays the IDs of all VLANs that are configured on the switch.

8. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address to be configured for the VLAN routing interface.

9. In the Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet mask to be configured for the VLAN routing

interface.

10. Click the Add button.

The VLAN routing interface is added for the selected VLAN ID.

The entry in the MAC Address field is automatically entered.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 62. VLAN Routing Configuration information

Field Description

Port The interface that is assigned to the VLAN for routing.

MAC Address The MAC address that is assigned to the VLAN routing interface.

Routing Mode Indicates whether routing is enabled for the VLAN routing Interface.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual294

Delete a VLAN routing interface

You can delete a VLAN routing interface that you no longer need.

To delete a VLAN routing interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> VLAN > VLAN Routing Configuration.

The VLAN Routing Configuration page displays.

7. From the VLAN menu, select the VLAN.

8. Click the Delete button.

The VLAN routing interface is removed. The VLAN itself is not removed.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual295

Configure router discovery for a VLAN

routing interface

By default, a VLAN routing interface does not send router advertisements.You can enable the

router advertisements for a VLAN routing interface and configure the setting for the router

advertisements.

To configure router discovery for a VLAN routing interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> Router Discovery > Router Discovery Configuration.

7. Select a check box to the left of the Interface column to select the router interface.

8. From the Advertise Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual296

If you select Enable, router advertisements are transmitted from the selected interface.

9. In the Advertise Address field, specify the IP address that must be advertised.

In the Maximum Advertise Interval field, enter the maximum time (in seconds) allowed

between router advertisements sent from the interface. The default value is 600.

10. In the Minimum Advertise Interval field, enter the minimum time (in seconds) allowed

between router advertisements sent from the interface.

The value must be in the range of 3 to 1800. The default value is 450.

In the Advertise Lifetime field, enter the value (in seconds) to be used as the lifetime

field in router advertisements sent from the interface.

This is the maximum length of time that the advertised addresses are to be considered as

valid router addresses by hosts. The default value is 1800.

11. In the Preference Level field, specify the preference level of the router as a default router

relative to other routers on the same subnet.

Higher numbered addresses are preferred. You must enter an integer. The default value

is 0.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage routes and view the routing table

The routing table collects routes from multiple sources: static routes and local routes. The

routing table can learn multiple routes to the same destination from multiple sources. The

routing table lists all routes.

Manually add a route and view the routing table

To manually add a default route or static route and view the routing table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual297

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> Routing Table > Route Configuration.

7. From the Route Type menu, select one of the following route types.

• DefaultRoute. Creates a default route. You must specify the next hop address and

preference.

• Static. Creates a static route. You must specify the network address, subnet mask,

next hop address, and preference.

Depending on the type of route that you are creating, specify the following information:

•In the Network Address field, specify the portion of the IP interface address that

identifies the attached network.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask.

•In the Next Hop IP Address field, specify the outgoing router IP address to use when

forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.

The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local

interface for a directly attached network.

•In the Preference field, specify the preference, which is an integer value from 1

to 255.

You can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of

an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the

lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual298

specifying the preference of a static route, you control whether a static route is more

or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also

controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the

same destination.

•In the Description field, enter a description for the route.

The description must consist of alphanumeric, hyphen, or underscore characters and

can be up to 31 characters in length.

8. Click the Add button.

The static route is added to the switch.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

10. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 63. Learned Routes information

Field Description

Network Address The IP route prefix for the destination.

Subnet Mask The portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network (also referred

to as the subnet or network mask).

Protocol The protocol that created the specified route. The possibilities are one of the following:

Route Type The route type can be Connected, Static, or Dynamic, depending on the protocol.

Next Hop Interface The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination.

Next Hop Address The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in

the path toward the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors

or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.

Preference The preference is an integer value from 0 to 255. The user can specify the preference

value (sometimes called administrative distance) of an individual static route. Among

routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route

entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, you

control whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing

protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred

than other static routes to the same destination.

Metric The administrative cost of the path to the destination. If no value is entered, the default

is 1. The range is 0–255.

• Local

• Static

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual299

Modify a route

You can modify an existing route.

To modify an existing route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> Routing Table > Route Configuration.

The Configure Routes page displays.

7. Select the check box for the route that you want to modify.

8. Modify the settings.

For more information, see Manually add a route and view the routing table on

page 296.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual300

Delete a route

You can delete a route that you no longer need.

To delete a route:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> Routing Table > Route Configuration.

The Configure Routes page displays.

7. Select the check box for the route that you want to delete.

8. Click the Delete button.

The route is deleted.

Configure Address Resolution Protocol

The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) associates a Layer 2 MAC address with a Layer 3

IPv4 address. ARP is a part of the Internet Protocol (IP) and is used to translate an IP

address to a media (MAC) address, defined by a LAN such as an Ethernet LAN.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual301

The switch supports both dynamic and manual ARP configurations. With a manual ARP

configuration, you can statically add entries to the ARP table.

A device that sends an IP packet must learn the MAC address of the IP destination, or, if the

destination is not on the same subnet, of the next hop router. The device broadcasts an ARP

request packet, to which the intended recipient responds with a unicast ARP reply that

contains its MAC address. The device then uses the MAC address in the destination address

field of the Layer 2 header that is prepended to the IP packet and sent to the recipient. Each

device in a network maintains its ARP cache locally.

The switch learns ARP cache entries by examining the source information in the ARP packet

payload fields, regardless of whether it is an ARP request or a response. In that way, when

an ARP request is broadcast to all stations on a LAN segment or VLAN, each recipient can

store the sender’s IP and MAC address in its ARP cache. Normally, only the requestor

receives an ARP response (a unicast message) and stores the sender’s information in its

ARP cache. The most recent information always replaces existing content in the ARP cache.

A device can be moved in a network, which means that the device’s IP address that was

associated with one MAC address is now associated with another MAC address. A device

can also disappear from the network altogether (for example, it was reconfigured,

disconnected, or powered off). These situations cause stale information in the ARP cache.

Therefore, entries are updated or periodically refreshed to determine if an address still exists.

If an entry was identified as a sender of an ARP packet, the entry can be removed from the

ARP cache. You can configure an age-out interval that determines how long an entry that is

not updated remains in the ARP cache.

View the ARP cache

You can view ARP entries in the ARP cache. The ARP cache is a table that lists the remote

connections that were recently detected by the switch.

To view entries in the ARP cache:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual302

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> ARP > Basic > ARP Cache.

7. Navigate through the table by doing the following:

•From the Rows per page menu, select how many table entries are displayed per

page.

Possible values are 20, 50, 100, 200, and All. If you select All, the browser might be

slow to display the information.

•Click the < button to display the previous page of the table data entries.

•Click the > button to display the next page of the table data entries.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Refresh button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 64. ARP cache information

Field Description

Management VLAN ARP Cache

IP Address The IP address associated with the system’s MAC address. This must be the IP

address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch’s existing routing

interfaces.

Port The associated interface ID of the connection.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the device. The address is six two-digit hexadecimal

numbers separated by colons, for example, 00:06:29:32:81:40.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual303

Manually add an entry to the ARP table

You can manually add an entry to the ARP table.

To manually add an entry to the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

Routing VLANs ARP Cache

IP Address The IP address. It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of

the switch’s existing routing interfaces.

Interface The routing interface associated with the ARP entry.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the device. The address is six two-digit hexadecimal

numbers separated by colons, for example 00:06:29:32:81:40.

Type The type of ARP entry. Possible values are as follows:

• Local. An ARP entry associated with one of the switch’s routing interface’s

MAC addresses.

• Gateway. A dynamic ARP entry whose IP address is that of a router.

• Static. An ARP entry configured by the user.

• Dynamic. An ARP entry that was learned by the router.

Age The time since the entry was last refreshed in the ARP table (in seconds).

Table 64. ARP cache information (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual304

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > ARP Create.

7. In the IP Address field, specify an IP address.

This must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's

existing routing interfaces.

8. In the MAC Address field, specify the unicast MAC address of the device.

Enter the address as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for

example, 00:06:29:32:81:40.

9. Click the Add button.

The static ARP entry is added to the switch.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page. You

can navigate through the table by doing the following:

•From the Rows per page menu, select how many table entries are displayed per

page.

Possible values are 20, 50, 100, 200, and All. If you select All, the browser might be

slow to display the information.

•Click the < button to display the previous page of the table data entries.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual305

•Click the > button to display the next page of the table data entries.

Table 65. Routing VLANs ARP Cache information

Field Description

IP Address The IP address. It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the

switch’s existing routing interfaces.

Interface The routing interface associated with the ARP entry.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address of the device. The address is six two-digit hexadecimal

numbers separated by colons, for example, 00:06:29:32:81:40.

Type The type of ARP entry. Possible values are as follows:

Age The time since the entry was last refreshed in the ARP table (in seconds).

View or globally configure the ARP table

You can change the global settings for the ARP table.

To view or configure the ARP table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

• Local. An ARP entry associated with one of the switch’s routing interface’s MAC

addresses.

• Gateway. A dynamic ARP entry whose IP address is that of a router.

• Static. An ARP entry configured by the user.

• Dynamic. An ARP entry that was learned by the router.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual306

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > Global ARP Configuration.

7. In the Age Time field, enter the time, in seconds, that a dynamic ARP entry remains in the

ARP table before aging out.

The range is 15 to 21600 seconds. The default value is 1200 seconds.

8. In the Response Time field, enter the time, in seconds, that the device waits for an ARP

response to an ARP request that it sends. The range for this field is 1 to 10 seconds. The

default value is 1 second.

9. In the Retries field, enter the maximum number of times an ARP request is retried after an

ARP response is not received.

The number includes the initial ARP request. The range for this field is 0 to 10. The

default value is 4.

10. In the Cache Size field, specify the maximum number of entries allowed in the ARP table.

This number includes all IPv4 ARP and IPv6 Neighbor static and dynamic entries. The

range for this field is 79 to 512. The default value is 512.

11. Select the Dynamic Renew Enable or Disable radio button.

When enabled, the ARP component automatically attempts to renew dynamic ARP

entries when they age out. The default setting is Enable.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove ARP entries from the ARP cache

You can remove entries from the ARP cache.

To remove entries from the ARP cache:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Routing User Manual307

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Routing> ARP > Advanced > ARP Entry Management.

7. From the Remove From Table menu, select the type of ARP entry to be deleted:

• All Dynamic Entries

• All Dynamic and Gateway Entries

• Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry. Lets you specify the IP address to be removed.

• Specific Static Entry. Lets you specify the IP address to be removed.

8. If you select Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry or Specific Static Entry, in the Remove IP

Address field, enter the IP address to be removed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

308

5Configure Quality of Service

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Quality of Service concepts

•Manage Class of Service

•Manage Differentiated Services

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual309

Quality of Service concepts

In a switch, each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on the

attached network. Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain

packets over others based on user-defined criteria. When a packet is queued for

transmission in a port, the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is

configured and possibly the amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port. If a

delay is necessary, packets are held in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for

transmission. As queues become full, packets can no longer be held for transmission and are

dropped by the switch.

Quality of Service (QoS) is a means of providing consistent, predictable data delivery by

distinguishing packets with strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of

delay. Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS-capable

network. With this in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS capable. The presence

of at least one node that is not QoS capable creates a deficiency in the network path, and the

performance of the entire packet flow is compromised.

Manage Class of Service

The Class of Service (CoS) queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of

switch queueing. This provides the desired QoS behavior for different types of network traffic

when the complexities of DiffServ are not required. The priority of a packet arriving at an

interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a

mapping table. CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping, such as minimum

guaranteed bandwidth or transmission rate shaping, are user configurable at the queue (or

port) level.

Eight queues per port are supported.

CoS configuration concepts

You can set the Class of Service trust mode for an interface. Each port in the switch can be

configured to trust one of the packet fields (802.1p or IP DSCP), or to not trust any packet’s

priority designation (untrusted mode). If the port is set to a trusted mode, it uses a mapping

table appropriate for the trusted field being used. This mapping table indicates the CoS

queue to which the packet must be forwarded on the appropriate egress port. Of course, the

trusted field must exist in the packet for the mapping table to be of any use. If this is not the

case, default actions are performed. These actions involve directing the packet to a specific

CoS level configured for the ingress port as a whole, based on the existing port default

priority as mapped to a traffic class by the current 802.1p mapping table.

Alternatively, when a port is configured as untrusted, it does not trust any incoming packet

priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead. All packets arriving at the

ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual310

ports, in accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port. This process is

also used for cases where a trusted port mapping cannot be honored, such as when a non-IP

packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value.

Configure the global CoS settings

A global configuration setting is automatically applied to all interfaces on the switch.

To configure CoS trust mode settings on all interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS> CoS > Basic > CoS Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual311

7. Either configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS-configurable interfaces or

configure CoS settings per interface.

By default, the Global radio button is selected.

•To configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS configurable interfaces, do

the following:

a. Select the Global radio button.

b. From the Global Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode

options for ingress traffic on the switch:

- Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

- 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.

The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven

internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.

- DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

•To configure CoS settings per interface, do the following:

a. Select the Interface radio button.

b. From the Interface Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode

options:

- Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

- 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.

The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven

internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.

- DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the CoS settings for an interface

You can configure the trust mode for one or more interfaces and apply an interface shaping

rate to all interfaces or to a specific interface.

To configure CoS settings for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual312

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > CoS Interface Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual313

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Interface Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode options for

ingress traffic on the selected interfaces:

• Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

• 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7. The

QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven internal

hardware priority queues. The default value is 802.1p.

• DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the Differentiated

Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

10. In the Interface Shaping Rate field, specify the maximum egress bandwidth allowed.

This fields is typically used to shape the outbound transmission rate in increments of

16 Kbps in the range of 16 to 1000000 kbps.This value is controlled independently of any

per-queue maximum bandwidth configuration. It is effectively a second-level shaping

mechanism. The default value is 0. The value 0 means that the maximum is unlimited.

The expected shaping at egress interface is calculated as follows:

frameSize × shaping/(frameSize + IFG), where IFG (Inter frame gap) is 20 bytes,

frameSize is configured frame size, and shaping is configured traffic shaping.

For example, when 64 bytes frame size and 64 kbps shaping are configured, expected

shaping is approximately 48 kbps.

11. In the Interface Ingress Rate Limit field, specify the maximum ingress bandwidth allowed.

This field is typically used to shape the inbound transmission rate in increments of

16 Kbps in the range of 16 to 1000000 kbps. If the inbound traffic exceeds the specified

rate limit, the traffic is dropped.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the CoS queue settings for an interface

You can define what a particular queue does by configuring switch egress queues. You can

control how much bandwidth is used by the queue, the queue depth during times of

congestion, and the scheduling of packet transmission from all queues on a port. Each port

contains its own CoS queue-related configuration.

For information about configuring CoS queue settings globally, see Configure the global

CoS settings on page 310.

To configure CoS queue settings for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual314

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > Interface Queue Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual315

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Queue ID menu, select the queue to be configured.

10. From the Scheduler Type menu, select one of the following options:

• Strict. The interface services traffic with the highest priority on a queue first.

•Weighted. The interface uses weighted round robin to associate a weight to each

queue. This is the default setting.

The Queue Management Type field displays the queue depth management technique

that is used for queues on the interface. By default, this method is Taildrop, irrespective of

your selection from the Scheduler Type menu.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Map 802.1p priorities to queue

You can view or change which internal traffic classes are mapped to the 802.1p priority class

values in Ethernet frames that the device receives. The priority-to-traffic class mappings can

be applied globally or per interface. The mapping allows the switch to group various traffic

types (for example, data or voice) based on their latency requirements and give preference to

time-sensitive traffic.

To map 802.1p priorities to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual316

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > 802.1p to Queue Mapping.

7. In the 802.1p to Queue Mapping table, map each of the eight 802.1p priorities to a queue

(internal traffic class).

The 802.1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802.1p

priorities to be mapped. The priority goes from low (0) to high (7). For example, traffic with

a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using best effort. Traffic with a higher

priority, such as 7, might be time-sensitive traffic, such as voice or video.

The values in the menu under each priority represent the traffic class. The traffic class is

the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue

position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in higher queues to

be sent.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Map DSCP values to queues

You can map an internal traffic class to a DSCP value.

To map DSCP values to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual317

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > DSCP to Queue Mapping.

7. For each DSCP value, select from the corresponding Queue menu which internal traffic

class must be mapped to the DSCP value.

The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a

higher queue position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in

higher queues to be sent.

The allowed Per Hop Behavior (PHBs) values, apart from other DSCP experimental

values, are as follows:

• Class Selector (CS) PHB. These values are based on IP precedence.

• Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB. These values define four main levels to sort and

manipulate some flows within the network.

• Expedited Forwarding (EF) PHB. These values are used to prioritize traffic for

real-time applications. In many situations, if the network exceeded traffic and you

need some bandwidth guaranteed for an application, the EF traffic must receive this

rate independently of the intensity of any other traffic attempting to transit the node.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual318

Manage Differentiated Services

The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services (DiffServ) support that allows traffic to be

classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per-hop

behaviors.

Standard IP-based networks provide best-effort data delivery service. Best-effort service

implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion, although there is no guarantee.

If congestion occurs, packets might be delayed, sent sporadically, or dropped. For typical

Internet applications, such as email and file transfers, a slight degradation in service is

acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. However, any degradation of service can

negatively affect applications with strict timing requirements, such as voice and multimedia.

Defining DiffServ

To use DiffServ for QoS, you must first define the following categories and their criteria:

1. Class. Create classes and define class criteria.

2. Policy. Create policies, associate classes with policies, and define policy statements.

3. Service. Add a policy to an inbound interface.

Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria. The classification criteria are

defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy’s attributes. Policy attributes can be

defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match

occurs. A policy can contain multiples classes. When the policy is active, the actions taken

depend on which class matches the packet.

Packet processing begins by testing the class match criteria for a packet. A policy is applied

to a packet when a class match within that policy is found.

Defining DiffServ

To use DiffServ for QoS, you must first define the following categories and their criteria:

1. Class. Create classes and define class criteria.

2. Policy. Create policies, associate classes with policies, and define policy statements.

3. Service. Add a policy to an inbound interface.

Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria. The classification criteria are

defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy’s attributes. Policy attributes can be

defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match

occurs. A policy can contain multiples classes. When the policy is active, the actions taken

depend on which class matches the packet.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual319

Note the following about the DiffServ process:

•Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria. The filtering criteria is

defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy's attributes. Policy attributes can

be defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a

match occurs.

•The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class.

Then one or more classes are added to a policy. Policies are then added to interfaces.

Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet. The All class type option

specifies that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet to match

that class. The Any class type option specifies that at least one match criteria must evaluate

to true for a packet to match that class. Classes are tested in the order in which they were

added to the policy. A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is

found.

Configure the DiffServ mode and display the entries in the

DiffServ private MIB tables

You can enable or disable DiffServ and display the current and maximum number of rows in

each of the main DiffServ private MIB tables.

To configure the DiffServ mode and display the entries in the DiffServ private MIB

tables:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual320

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > DiffServ Configuration.

7. Select the administrative mode for DiffServ:

• Enable. Differentiated services are active. This is the default setting.

• Disable. The DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed but is not active.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the information displayed in the Status table on the DiffServ

Configuration page.

Table 66. DiffServ Status information

Field Description

Class Table The number of configured DiffServ classes out of the total allowed on the switch.

Class Rule table The number of configured class rules out of the total allowed on the switch.

Policy table The number of configured policies out of the total allowed on the switch.

Policy Instance table The number of configured policy class instances out of the total allowed on the

switch.

Policy Attributes table The number of configured policy attributes (attached to the policy class instances)

out of the total allowed on the switch.

Service table The number of configured services (attached to the policies on specified interfaces)

out of the total allowed on the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual321

Configure a DiffServ class

You can add a new DiffServ class name, or rename or delete an existing class. You can also

define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class. As packets are received, these DiffServ

classes are used to prioritize packets. You can set up multiple match criteria in a class. The

logic is a Boolean logical AND for this criteria. After creating a class, click the class link to the

Class page.

Add and configure a DiffServ class

To create and configure a DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual322

7. In the Class Name field, enter a class name.

The Class Name field also lists all the existing DiffServ class names, from which you can

select one for modification or deletion. The class name can be 1 to 31 alphanumeric

characters in length.

8. From the Class Type menu, select the class type.

The switch supports only the class type value All, which means that all the various match

criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND

statement of all the match criteria. You can select the class type only when you are

creating a new class. After the class is created, the Class Type field becomes

nonconfigurable.

9. Click the Add button.

The new class is added.

10. After creating the class, click the class name.

The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class

configuration.

11. Define the criteria that must be associated the DiffServ class:

• Match Every. Select this radio button to add a match condition that considers all

packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the Match Every menu is Any.

• Reference Class. Select this radio button to reference another class for criteria. The

match criteria defined in the reference class function as match criteria in addition to

the match criteria that you define for the selected class. After you select the radio

button, the classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to

reference. A class can reference at most one other class of the same type.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual323

• Class of Service. Select this radio button to require the Class of Service (CoS) value

in an Ethernet frame header to match the specified CoS value. This option lists all the

values for the Class of Service match criterion in the range 0 to 7 from which one can

be selected.

• VLAN. Select this radio button to require a packet’s VLAN ID to match a VLAN ID or a

VLAN ID within a continuous range. If you configure a range, a match occurs if a

packet’s VLAN ID is the same as any VLAN ID within the range. The VLAN value is in

the range of 0–4093.

• Ethernet Type. Select this radio button to require the EtherType value in the Ethernet

frame header to match the specified EtherType value. After you select the radio

button, specify the EtherType keyword from the list of common protocols that are

mapped to their Ethertype value.

• Source MAC. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source MAC address to

match the specified MAC address. After you select this radio button, use the following

fields to configure the source MAC address match criteria:

- Address. The source MAC address to match. The source MAC address is

specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.

- Mask. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the source MAC address to

compare against the Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

• Destination MAC. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination MAC

address to match the specified MAC address. After you select the radio button, use

the following fields to configure the destination MAC address match criteria:

- Address. The destination MAC address to match. The destination MAC address

is specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.

- Mask. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the destination MAC address to

compare against an Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

• Protocol Type. Select this radio button to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match

the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes

Other as a selection, which lets you enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

• Source IP. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source IP address to match

the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following fields to

configure the source IP address match criteria:

- Address. The source IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual324

- Mask. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

source IP address to use for matching against packet content.

• Source L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to

match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The range is 0 to

65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed ports.

• Destination IP. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination IP address to

match the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following

fields to configure the destination IP address match criteria:

- Address. The destination IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.

- Mask. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

destination IP address to use for matching against packet content.

•Destination L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP

destination port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu.

The range is 0 to 65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed ports.

• IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point

(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select

from the menu. The menu includes Other as a selection, which lets you enter an IP

DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

• Precedence Value. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP precedence

value to match the specified number from 0 to 7, which you must select from the

menu. The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high-order 3 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

• IP ToS. Select this radio button to require the packet’s Type of Service (ToS) bits in the

IP header to match the specified value. The IP ToS field in a packet is defined as all 8

bits of the service type octet in the IP header. After you select the radio button, use

the following fields to configure the ToS match criteria:

- Bits Value. Enter a two-digit hexadecimal number octet value in the range from 00

to ff to match the bits in a packet’s ToS field.

- Bit Mask. Specify the bit positions that are used for comparison against the IP ToS

field in a packet.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Class

Summary section at the bottom of the DiffServ Advanced Class Configuration page.

Table 67. DiffServ Class Configuration, Class Summary information

Field Description

Match Criteria The configured match criteria for the specified class.

Values The values of the configured match criteria.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual325

Rename an existing DiffServ class

To rename an existing DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the class name.

8. In the Class Name field, specify the new name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the criteria for an existing DiffServ class

To change the criteria for an existing DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual326

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.

8. Change the class configuration as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete a DiffServ class

To delete a DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual327

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the class name.

8. Click the Delete button.

The class is removed.

Configure DiffServ IPv6 class settings

The switch supports QoS ACL and DiffServ functionality for IPv6 by providing support for

IPv6 packet classification. An IPv6 ACL serves the same purpose as an IPv4 ACL.

An Ethernet IPv6 packet is distinguished from an IPv4 packet by its unique Ethertype value,

so all IPv6 classifiers include the Ethertype field, even though you cannot configure its value

on the switch.

The destination and source IPv6 addresses use a prefix length value instead of an individual

mask to qualify them as a subnet addresses or a host addresses. Packets that match an IPv6

classifier can be marked with the IP DSCP field in the traffic class octet.

You can also assign an IPv6 ACL with a DiffServ assignment to LAG interfaces.

Create and configure an IPv6 DiffServ class

To create and configure an IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual328

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

7. Enter a class name in the Class Name field.

The Class Name field also lists all the existing IPv6 class names, from which one can be

selected for modification or deletion.

8. From the Class Type menu, select the class type.

The switch supports only the class type value All, which means that all the various match

criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND

statement of all the match criteria. You can select the class type only when you are

creating a new class. After the class is created, the Class Type field becomes

nonconfigurable.

9. Click the Add button.

The new class is added.

10. After creating the class, click the class name.

The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class

configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual329

11. Define the criteria that must be associated the IPv6 DiffServ class:

• Match Every. Select this radio button to add a match condition that considers all

packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the Match Every menu is Any.

• Reference Class. Select this radio button to reference another class for criteria. The

match criteria defined in the reference class function as match criteria in addition to

the match criteria that you define for the selected class. After selecting this option, the

classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to reference. A class

can reference at most one other class of the same type.

• Protocol Type. Select this radio button to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match

the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes

Other as a selection, which lets you enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

• Source Prefix/Length. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source prefix and

prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length. Prefix must

always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the hexadecimal range

from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and the prefix length can

be in the range from 0 to 128.

• Source L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to

match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. The range is 0 to

65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed ports.

• Destination Prefix/Length. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination

prefix and prefix length to match the specified source IPv6 prefix and prefix length.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual330

Prefix must always be specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be in the

hexadecimal range from 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and

the prefix length can be in the range from 0 to 128.

• Destination L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP

destination port to match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu.

The range is 0 to 65535. The menu includes Other as an option for unnamed ports.

• IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point

(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select

from the menu. The menu includes Other as a selection, which lets you enter an IP

DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed in the Class

Summary section.

Table 68. IPv6 DiffServ class configuration class summary

Field Description

Match Criteria The configured match criteria for the specified class.

Values The values of the configured match criteria.

Rename an existing IPv6 DiffServ class

To rename an existing IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual331

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the class name.

8. In the Class Name field, specify the new name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the criteria for an existing IPv6 DiffServ class

To change the criteria for an existing IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual332

The Class Name page displays.

7. Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.

8. Change the class configuration as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an IPv6 DiffServ class

To delete an IPv6 DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the class name.

8. Click the Delete button.

The class is removed.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual333

Configure a DiffServ Policy

You can associate a collection of classes with one or more policies.

Create and configure a DiffServ policy

To create and configure a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

7. Enter a policy name in the Policy Name field.

You cannot specify the policy type. By default, the policy type is In, indicating that the

policy applies to ingress packets.

8. From the Member Class menu, optionally select an existing class that you want to

associate with the new policy.

9. Click the Add button.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual334

The new policy is added.

10. After creating the policy, click the policy name.

The policy name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the policy attributes.

11. From the Assign Queue menu, select the queue to which packets of this policy class must

be assigned.

This is an integer value in the range 0 to 7.

12. Configure the policy attributes:

• Drop. Select this radio button to require each inbound packet to be dropped.

• Mark VLAN CoS. Select this radio button to specify the VLAN priority, which you must

select from the menu. The VLAN priority is expressed as an integer value in the range

from 0 to 7.

• Mark IP Precedence. Select this radio button to require packets to be marked with an

IP precedence value before being forwarded. You must select an IP precedence

value from 0 to 7 from the menu.

• Mirror. Select this radio button to require packets to be mirrored to an interface or

LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual335

• Redirect. Select this radio button to require packets to be redirected to an interface or

LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.

• Mark IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require packet to be marked with an IP

DSCP keyword code, which you must select from the menu. The menu includes

Other as a selection, which lets you enter an IP DSCP value from 0 to 63. The DSCP

value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.

• Simple Policy. Select this radio button to define the traffic policing style for the class.

A simple policy uses a single data rate and burst size, resulting in one of two

outcomes: conform or violate. You must define the policy as described in the next

step.

13. To specify the traffic policing style for the class, select the Simple Policy radio button.

Note: By default, the Color Mode field is set to Color Blind. Color classes do

not apply. Also, by default, the violating action is set to Drop. Traffic

that violates the specified policy are dropped.

a. In the Committed Rate field, enter the committed rate that is applied to conforming

packets by specifying a value in the range from 1 to 4294967295 Kbps.

b. Select the conforming action that the switch takes when a packet conforms to the

policing metrics:

• Send. Packets are forwarded unmodified. This is the default confirming action and

the default violating action.

•Drop. Packets are dropped.

• Mark CoS. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value before

being forwarded. This selection requires that the Mark CoS field is set. You must

select a CoS value from 0 to 7 from the menu.

• Mark IP Precedence. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified IP

Precedence value before being forwarded. This selection requires that the Mark

IP Precedence field is set. You must select an IP precedence value from 0 to 7

from the menu.

• Mark IP DSCP. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP value

before being forwarded. This selection requires that the DSCP field is set. You

must select a DSCP code from the menu. The DSCP value is defined as the

high-order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 69. DiffServ policy configuration policy attribute

Field Description

Policy Name The name of the DiffServ policy.

Policy Type The type of the policy, which is always inbound (In).

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual336

Rename an existing DiffServ policy

To rename an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the policy name.

8. In the Policy Name field, specify the new name.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Member Class Name The name of the class instance within the policy.

Table 69. DiffServ policy configuration policy attribute (continued)

Field Description

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual337

Change the policy attributes for an existing DiffServ policy

To change the policy attributes for an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

7. Click the policy name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the policy attributes displays.

8. Change the policy attributes as needed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change or remove a class from an existing DiffServ policy

To change or remove a class from an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual338

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the policy name.

8. Do one of the following:

•To change the class, select another class rom the Member Class menu.

•To remove the class, select None, from the Member Class menu.

9. Click the Apply button.

The class is removed from the policy.

Delete a DiffServ policy

To delete a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual339

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the policy name.

8. Click the Delete button.

The policy is removed.

Configure the DiffServ service interface

You can activate a policy on an interface.

Attach a DiffServ policy to an interface

To attach a DiffServ policy to an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual340

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

8. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

9. From the Policy Name menu, select a policy name.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual341

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 70. Service Interface Configuration information

Field Description

Direction Shows the traffic direction of this service interface (either In or Out).

Operational Status Shows the operational status of this service interface (either Up or Down).

Change the DiffServ policy for an interface

To change the DiffServ policy for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

The Service Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

• LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual342

8. Select the check box for the interface.

9. From the Policy In Name menu, select another policy name.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a DiffServ policy from an interface

To remove a DiffServ policy from an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

The Service Interface Configuration page displays.

7. Select whether to display physical interfaces, LAGs, or both by clicking one of the following

links above the table heading:

•1 (the unit ID of the switch). Only physical interfaces are displayed. This is the default

setting.

•LAG. Only LAGs are displayed.

• All. Both physical interfaces and LAGs are displayed.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual343

8. Select the check boxes that are associated with the interfaces from which you want to

remove the policy.

9. From the Policy In Name menu, select None.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View DiffServ service statistic

You can display service-level statistical information about all interfaces to which DiffServ

policies are attached.

To view the DiffServ service statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Statistics.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Configure Quality of Service User Manual344

7. Click the Refresh button to refresh the page with the latest information about the switch.

The following table describes the information available on the Service Statistics page.

Table 71. DiffServ Service Statistics information

Field Description

Interface All valid port numbers on the switch with a DiffServ policy that is attached in the inbound

direction.

Direction The traffic direction of interface is inbound (In). This field shows only the direction for

which a DiffServ policy is attached.

Policy Name The name of the policy that is currently attached to the specified interface and direction.

Operational Status The operational status of the policy that is attached to the specified interface and

direction. The value is either Up or Down.

Member Classes All DiffServ classes that are defined as members of the selected policy name. Select a

member class name to display its statistics. If no class is associated with the selected

policy, then the list is empty.

345

6Manage Device Security

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Change the local device password for the local browser UI

•Manage the RADIUS settings

•Configure the TACACS+ settings

•Configure authentication lists

•Manage the Smart Control Center Utility

•Configure management access

•Control access with profiles and rules

•Configure port authentication

•Set up traffic control

•Configure access control lists

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual346

Change the local device password for the

local browser UI

You can change the local device password for local browser UI:

To change the local device password for the local browser UI:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security> Management Security > User Configuration > Change Password.

7. In the Old Password field, specify the current password for the account created by the user.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual347

The entered password is displayed in dots. Passwords are up to 20 alphanumeric

characters in length, and are case sensitive.

8. In the New Password field, specify the optional new or changed password for the account.

Use the following guidelines for a new password:

•The minimum length of the password must be eight characters.

•The password must include at least one uppercase letter, one lowercase letter, and

one numeral.

•Although it is not required, we recommend that you include a special character in the

password.

If the new password does not conform to the requirements, the switch rejects the

password.

The entered password is displayed in dots. Passwords are up to 20 alphanumeric

characters in length, and are case sensitive.

9. In the Confirm Password field, enter the password again to confirm that you entered it

correctly.

The entered password is displayed in dots.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage the RADIUS settings

RADIUS servers provide additional security for networks. The RADIUS server maintains a

user database, which contains per-user authentication information. The switch passes

information to the configured RADIUS server, which can authenticate a user name and

password before authorizing use of the network. RADIUS servers provide a centralized

authentication method for the following:

•Web access

•Access control port (802.1X)

Configure the global RADIUS server settings

You can add information about one or more RADIUS servers on the network.

If you configure multiple RADIUS servers, consider the maximum delay time when you

specify the maximum number of retransmissions (that is, the value that you enter in the Max

Number of Retransmits field) and the time-out period (that is, the value that you enter in the

Timeout Duration field) for RADIUS:

For one RADIUS server, a retransmission does not occur until the configured time-out

period expires without a response from the RADIUS server. In addition. the maximum

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual348

number of retransmissions for one RADIUS server must pass before the switch attempts

the next RADIUS server.

Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving a RADIUS response on the switch equals the

maximum number of retransmissions multiplied by the time-out period multiplied by the

number of configured RADIUS servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a user

response.

To configure the global RADIUS server settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Global Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual349

The Current Server IP Address field is blank if no servers are configured (see Configure

a RADIUS authentication server on the switch on page 350). The switch supports up to

three RADIUS servers. If more than one RADIUS server is configured, the current server

is the server configured as the primary server. If no servers are configured as the primary

server, the current server is the most recently added RADIUS server.

CAUTION:

The maximum delay in receiving a RADIUS response on the switch equals

the maximum number of retransmissions multiplied by the time-out period

multiplied by the number of configured RADIUS servers. If the RADIUS

request was generated by a user login attempt, all user interfaces are

blocked until the switch receives a RADIUS response.

7. In the Max Number of Retransmits field, specify the maximum number of times a request

packet is retransmitted to the RADIUS server.

The range is from 1 to 15. The default value is 4.

8. In the Timeout Duration field, specify the time-out value, in seconds, for request

retransmissions.

The range is from 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

9. From he Accounting Mode menu, select to disable or enable RADIUS accounting on the

server.

The default is Disabled.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields displayed on the page.

Table 72. RADIUS Configuration information

Field Description

Current Server Address The address of the current server. This field is blank if no servers are configured.

Number of Configured

Authentication Servers

The number of configured authentication RADIUS servers. The value can range

from 0 to 3.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual350

Configure a RADIUS authentication server on the switch

You can configure various settings for a RADIUS authentication server.

Add a primary RADIUS authentication server to the switch

To add a primary RADIUS authentication server to the switch and view or reset the

RADIUS authentication server statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

7. In the Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS server.

8. In the Authentication Port field, specify the UDP port number the server uses to verify the

RADIUS server authentication.

The valid range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 1812.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual351

9. From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes.

You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the

RADIUS server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server was

configured.

10. In the Secret field, type the shared secret text string used for authenticating and encrypting

all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS server.

This secret must match the RADIUS encryption.

11. From the Active menu, select Primary.

12. From the Message Authenticator menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the

message authenticator attribute for the selected server is enabled.

The message authenticator adds protection to RADIUS messages by using an MD5 hash

to encrypt each message. The shared secret is used as the key, and if the message fails

to be verified by the RADIUS server, it is discarded.

13. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the switch.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify the settings for a RADIUS authentication server on the switch

To modify the settings for a RADIUS authentication server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual352

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

The Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

8. Modify the configuration for the selected server.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a RADIUS authentication server from the switch

To a remove a RADIUS authentication server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

The Server Configuration page displays.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual353

7. Select the check box next to the IP address of the server to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The RADIUS server is removed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a RADIUS accounting server

You can configure various settings for a RADIUS accounting server on the network.

Add a RADIUS accounting server to the switch

To add a RADIUS accounting server to the switch and view or clear the RADIUS

accounting server statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual354

7. In the Accounting Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS accounting

server to add.

8. In the Port field, specify the UDP port number the server uses to verify the RADIUS

accounting server authentication. The default UDP port number is 1813.

9. From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes to add a RADIUS secret in the next field.

You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the

RADIUS accounting server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server

was configured.

10. In the Secret field, type the shared secret to use with the specified accounting server.

11. From the Accounting Mode menu, select Enable to enable the RADIUS accounting mode.

12. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the switch.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify the settings for a RADIUS accounting server on the switch

To modify the settings for a RADIUS accounting server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual355

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

8. Modify the configuration for the selected accounting server.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a RADIUS accounting server from the switch

To a remove a RADIUS accounting server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual356

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the IP address of the server to remove.

8. Click the Delete button.

The RADIUS accounting server is removed.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the TACACS+ settings

TACACS+ provides a centralized user management system, while still retaining consistency

with RADIUS and other authentication processes. TACACS+ provides the following services:

• Authentication. Provides authentication during login and through user names and

user-defined passwords.

• Authorization. Performed at login. When the authentication session is completed, an

authorization session starts using the authenticated user name. The TACACS+ server

checks the user privileges.

The TACACS+ protocol ensures network security through encrypted protocol exchanges

between the device and TACACS+ server.

Configure the global TACACS+ settings

You can configure the global TACACS+ settings for communication between the switch and a

TACACS+ server.

To configure the global TACACS+ settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual357

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > TACACS+ > TACACS+ Configuration.

7. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+

communications between the switch and the TACACS+ server.

The valid range is 0–128. The key must match the key configured on the TACACS+

server.

8. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the maximum number of seconds allowed to

establish a TCP connection between the switch and the TACACS+ server.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a TACACS+ server on the switch

You can configure up to five TACACS+ servers with which the switch can communicate.

To configure a TACACS+ server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual358

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

7. In the TACACS+ Server field, enter the TACACS+ server IP address.

8. In the Priority field, specify the priority for the TACACS+ server.

The priority determines the order in which the TACACS+ servers are contacted when

attempting to authenticate a user. A value of 0 is the highest priority. The valid range is

0–65535.

9. In the Port field, specify the authentication port value for TACAS+ server sessions. It must

be within the range 0–65535. If you do not specify a value, the switch uses the standard

TCP port 49 for sessions with the server.

10. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+

communications between the device and the TACACS+ server.

The valid range is 0–128. The key must match the key used on the TACACS+ server.

11. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the time that passes before the connection

between the device and the TACACS+ server times out.

The range is 1–30. If you do not specify a value, the switch uses a default value of 5.

12. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the switch.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual359

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify the settings for a TACACS+ server on the switch

To modify the settings for a TACACS+ server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

8. Modify the configuration for the selected TACACS+ server.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual360

Remove a TACACS+ server from the switch

To remove a TACACS+ server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

7. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

8. Click the Delete button.

The TACACS+ server is removed.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual361

Configure authentication lists

A login list specifies one or more authentication methods to validate switch or port access for

the admin user. You can configure a default login list.

Note: The admin user is assigned to a preconfigured list that is named

defaultList and that you cannot delete.

Configure an HTTP authentication list

You can configure the default HTTP login list.

To change the HTTP authentication method for the default list:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTP Authentication

List.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual362

7. Select the check box next to the httpList name.

8. From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in

the selected authentication login list.

If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as Local, no other

method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. User authentication occurs

in the order the methods are selected. Possible methods are as follows:

• Local. The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication. Since

the Local method does not time out, if you select this option as the first method, no

other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method.

• RADIUS. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the RADIUS server. If

you select RADIUS or TACACS+ as the first method and an error occurs during the

authentication, the switch uses Method 2 to authenticate the user.

• TACACS+. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the TACACS+

server. If you select RADIUS or TACACS+ as the first method and an error occurs

during the authentication, the switch attempts user authentication Method 2.

• None. The authentication method is unspecified. This option is available only for

Method 2 and Method 3.

9. From the menu in the 2 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

second in the selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if the first method times out. If you select a method that

does not time out as the second method, the third method is not tried.

10. From the menu in the 3 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

third in the selected authentication login list.

11. From the menu in the 4 column, select the method, if any, that must be used fourth in the

selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if all previous methods time out.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual363

Configure an HTTPS authentication list

You can configure the default login list for secure HTTP (HTTPS).

To configure an HTTPS authentication list:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Access the switch on-network and

connected to the Internet on page 20 or Access the switch off-network on page 32.

The Local Device Login page displays.

If you did not yet register the switch with your NETGEAR account, the Register to unlock

all features page displays. For more information, see Register the switch on page 35.

4. Enter one of the following passwords:

•After initial login, enter your local device password.

By default, the local device password is password. You must change this password

at initial login.

•If you previously managed the switch through the Insight app or Cloud portal, enter

the Insight network password for the last Insight network location.

For information about the credentials, see Credentials for the local browser UI on

page 34.

5. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

6. Select Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTPS Authentication

List.

7. Select the check box next to the httpsList name.

24-Port and 48-Port Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Smart Managed Pro Switches with 4 SFP Ports

Manage Device Security User Manual364

8. From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in

the selected authentication login list.

If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as Local, no other

method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. This setting does not display

when you first create a new login list. User authentication occurs in the order the methods

are selected. Possible methods are as follows: